Fluke Calibration 5502A Multi-Product Calibrator Service Manual
Fluke Calibration 5502A is a multi-product calibrator that provides accurate and reliable calibration for a wide range of electrical and electronic instruments. With its high precision and versatility, the 5502A is ideal for use in calibration laboratories, manufacturing facilities, and field service applications. The 5502A can calibrate a variety of instruments, including multimeters, oscilloscopes, power supplies, and temperature sensors.
Advertisement
Advertisement
September 2014
© 2014 Fluke Corporation. All rights reserved. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
All product names are trademarks of their respective companies.
5502A
Multi-Product Calibrator
Service Manual
LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
Each Fluke product is warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service. The warranty period is one year and begins on the date of shipment.
Parts, product repairs, and services are warranted for 90 days. This warranty extends only to the original buyer or end-user customer of a Fluke authorized reseller, and does not apply to fuses, disposable batteries, or to any product which, in Fluke's opinion, has been misused, altered, neglected, contaminated, or damaged by accident or abnormal conditions of operation or handling. Fluke warrants that software will operate substantially in accordance with its functional specifications for 90 days and that it has been properly recorded on non-defective media. Fluke does not warrant that software will be error free or operate without interruption.
Fluke authorized resellers shall extend this warranty on new and unused products to end-user customers only but have no authority to extend a greater or different warranty on behalf of Fluke.
Warranty support is available only if product is purchased through a Fluke authorized sales outlet or Buyer has paid the applicable international price. Fluke reserves the right to invoice Buyer for importation costs of repair/replacement parts when product purchased in one country is submitted for repair in another country.
Fluke's warranty obligation is limited, at Fluke's option, to refund of the purchase price, free of charge repair, or replacement of a defective product which is returned to a Fluke authorized service center within the warranty period.
To obtain warranty service, contact your nearest Fluke authorized service center to obtain return authorization information, then send the product to that service center, with a description of the difficulty, postage and insurance prepaid (FOB Destination). Fluke assumes no risk for damage in transit. Following warranty repair, the product will be returned to Buyer, transportation prepaid
(FOB Destination). If Fluke determines that failure was caused by neglect, misuse, contamination, alteration, accident, or abnormal condition of operation or handling, including overvoltage failures caused by use outside the product’s specified rating, or normal wear and tear of mechanical components, Fluke will provide an estimate of repair costs and obtain authorization before commencing the work. Following repair, the product will be returned to the Buyer transportation prepaid and the Buyer will be billed for the repair and return transportation charges (FOB
Shipping Point).
THIS WARRANTY IS BUYER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
FLUKE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, INCLUDING LOSS OF DATA, ARISING FROM
ANY CAUSE OR THEORY.
Since some countries or states do not allow limitation of the term of an implied warranty, or exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, the limitations and exclusions of this warranty may not apply to every buyer. If any provision of this Warranty is held invalid or unenforceable by a court or other decision-maker of competent jurisdiction, such holding will not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision.
Fluke Corporation
P.O. Box 9090
Everett, WA 98206-9090
U.S.A.
Fluke Europe B.V.
P.O. Box 1186
5602 BD Eindhoven
The Netherlands
ООО «Флюк СИАЙЭС»
125167, г. Москва,
Ленинградский проспект дом
37, кор. 9
Тел: +7 495 664 75 12
Факс: +7 495 664 75 13 e-mail:
11/99
OPERATOR SAFETY
SUMMARY
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
is used in the operation of this equipment
LETHAL VOLTAGE
may be present on the terminals, observe all safety precautions!
To prevent electrical shock hazard, the operator should not electrically contact the output HI or sense HI terminals or circuits connected to these terminals. During operation, lethal voltages of up to 1020 V ac or dc may be present on these terminals.
When the nature of the operation permits, keep one hand away from equipment to reduce the hazard of current flowing through vital organs of the body.
Contents (continued)
Table of Contents
Chapter Title Page
1
Introduction and Specifications ......................................................... 1-1
Temperature Calibration (Thermocouple) ..................................................... 1-17
Specification Limits for Power and Dual Output Operation ......................... 1-19
Calculate the Uncertainty Specifications of Power and Dual
Examples of Specified Power Uncertainties at Various Output Settings: ..... 1-21
Harmonics (2 nd
to 50 th
) .................................................................................. 1-22
AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Extended Bandwidth ............................................ 1-23
i
5502A
Service Manual
2
3
AC Voltage (Non-Sine Wave) (cont.) ........................................................... 1-24
AC Voltage, Square Wave Characteristics .................................................... 1-25
AC Voltage, Triangle Wave Characteristics (typical) ................................... 1-25
AC Current (Non-Sine Wave) (cont.) ............................................................ 1-26
AC Current, Square Wave Characteristics (typical) ...................................... 1-27
AC Current, Triangle Wave Characteristics (typical) ................................... 1-27
Theory of Operation ............................................................................ 2-1
Calibration and Verification ................................................................ 3-1
Equipment Necessary for Calibration and Verification ..................................... 3-2
DC Volts Calibration (NORMAL Output) .................................................... 3-4
DC Volts Calibration (30 V dc and Above) .................................................. 3-7
AC Volts Calibration (NORMAL Output) .................................................... 3-7
Thermocouple Function Calibration .............................................................. 3-9
DC Volts Calibration (AUX Output) ............................................................. 3-19
AC Volts Calibration (AUX Output) ............................................................. 3-19
Encoder (A2) PCA and Display Assembly ................................................... 4-7
Keyboard (A1) and Access the Output Block ............................................... 4-8
ii
5
Contents (continued)
List of Replaceable Parts .................................................................... 5-1
Leveled Sine Wave Function Specifications ................................................. 6-4
Time Marker Function Specifications ........................................................... 6-5
Trigger Signal Specifications for the Time Marker Function ....................... 6-6
Trigger Signal Specifications for the Edge Function .................................... 6-6
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification ....................................... 6-9
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Functions ................................... 6-12
Overview of HP3458A Operation ................................................................. 6-12
Setup for Square Wave Measurements .......................................................... 6-12
AC Square Wave Voltage Calibration ........................................................... 6-14
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration ................................................... 6-15
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Calibration ....................................................... 6-17
Verification at 1 M
Ω ................................................................................. 6-19
Verification at 50
Ω .................................................................................. 6-19
Verification at 1 M
Ω ................................................................................. 6-22
Verification at 50
Ω .................................................................................. 6-24
Leveled Sine Wave Reference Verification .................................................. 6-31
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification .................................................. 6-32
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification ................................................. 6-33
iii
5502A
Service Manual
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Verification ..................................................... 6-35
Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness ......................................... 6-35
Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness ......................................... 6-35
Verification at 1 M
Ω ................................................................................. 6-46
Verification at 50
Ω .................................................................................. 6-46
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function .................................................. 6-49
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics .......................................... 6-49
Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function .......................................... 6-50
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations ................................................................ 6-51
SC300 Hardware Adjustments for the A4 Board............................................... 6-52
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function .................................................. 6-53
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave VCO Balance ...................................... 6-53
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics .......................................... 6-54
Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function .......................................... 6-55
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations for Board 5500A-4004-1 ....................... 6-56
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations for Board 5500A-4004 ........................... 6-58
Adjusting the Rise Time for the Edge Function ............................................ 6-60
Adjusting the Edge Rise Time .................................................................. 6-60
7
SC600 Calibration Option ................................................................... 7-1
Trigger Signal Specifications (Pulse Function) ............................................. 7-4
Trigger Signal Specifications (Time Marker Function) ................................ 7-4
Trigger Signal Specifications (Edge Function) ............................................. 7-4
Trigger Signal Specifications (Square Wave Voltage Function)................... 7-4
Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications ......................... 7-4
Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications ...................... 7-4
Overload Measurement Specifications .......................................................... 7-5
iv
Contents (continued)
Input Impedance Mode (Resistance) ............................................................. 7-6
Input Impedance Mode (Capacitance) ........................................................... 7-6
Equipment Necessary for SC600 Calibration and Verification ......................... 7-8
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions ..................... 7-12
Overview of HP3458A Operation ................................................................. 7-12
Voltage Square Wave Measurement Setup ................................................... 7-12
Edge and Wave Gen Square Wave Measurements Setup ............................. 7-13
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration ................................................... 7-17
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Calibration ....................................................... 7-19
Verification at 1 M
Ω ................................................................................. 7-24
Verification at 50
Ω .................................................................................. 7-24
Verification at 1 M
Ω ................................................................................. 7-27
Verification at 50
Ω .................................................................................. 7-29
Tunnel Diode Pulser Drive Amplitude Verification ...................................... 7-36
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Verification ................................................. 7-37
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification .................................................. 7-38
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification ................................................. 7-39
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Verification ..................................................... 7-41
Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness ......................................... 7-41
Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness ......................................... 7-42
Wave Generator Verification Setup .......................................................... 7-47
Verification at 1 M
Ω ................................................................................. 7-48
Verification at 50
Ω ................................................................................... 7-49
How to Adjust the Leveled Sine Wave Function .......................................... 7-56
v
5502A
Service Manual
How to Adjust the Leveled Sine Wave VCO Balance .............................. 7-57
How to Adjust the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics ................................... 7-57
How to Adjust the Aberrations for the Edge Function .................................. 7-58
How to Adjust the Edge Aberrations ........................................................ 7-59
vi
List of Tables
Table Title Page
3-1. Consolidated List of Required Equipment for Calibration and Verification ......... 3-2
3-6. Test Equipment Necessary for Thermocouple Function Calibration ..................... 3-9
3-7. Thermocouple
Measurement Calibration Steps ..................................................... 3-9
................................................................................
4-1. Replacement
4-2. Replacement
4-3. Error
Current
Message
vii
5502A
Service Manual
Assembly
5-2. Rear-Panel
5-3. Chassis
5-4. Wiring
5-5. Final
6-2. AC Square Wave Voltage and Edge Settings for the HP3458A ............................ 6-12
6-3. DC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω .......................................................................... 6-20
6-4. DC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω ........................................................................... 6-21
6-5. AC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω .......................................................................... 6-23
6-6. AC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω ........................................................................... 6-24
6-7. AC
Frequency Verification ...................................................................... 6-26
....................................................................................................
6-24. Wave Generator Verification at 1 M
Ω ................................................................... 6-47
6-25. Wave Generator Verification at 50
Ω .................................................................... 6-48
Methods
7-5. DC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω .......................................................................... 7-25
7-6. DC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω ........................................................................... 7-26
7-7. AC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω .......................................................................... 7-28
7-8. AC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω ........................................................................... 7-30
7-9. AC
Frequency Verification ...................................................................... 7-31
....................................................................................................
7-21. Wave Generator Verification at 1 M
Ω ................................................................... 7-49
7-22. Wave Generator Verification at 50
Ω .................................................................... 7-50
7-23. Pulse Width Verification
viii
Contents (continued)
ix
5502A
Service Manual
x
List of Figures
Capacitance
Function
3-7. AC Current Calibration with Fluke A40 Shunt Connections ................................. 3-13
3-8. AC Current Calibration with Fluke A40A Shunt Connection ............................... 3-16
3-13. Normal Volts and AUX Volts Phase Verification Connection .............................. 3-24
Assembly
5-2. Rear-Panel
5-3. Chassis
Assembly
5-4. Wiring
...................................................................................................
Diagram
5-5. Final
6-2. Equipment Setup for SC300 Square Wave Measurements .................................... 6-13
6-3. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard . 6-16
ix
5502A
Service Manual
6-8. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard . 6-35
6-9. Connecting the HP E4418A Power Meter to the HP 8482A or 8481D
Power
6-10. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the HP Power Meter and Power Sensor 6-37
7-3. Equipment Setup for SC600 Voltage Square Wave Measurements ...................... 7-13
7-4. Equipment Setup for SC600 Edge and Wave Gen Square Wave Measurements .. 7-14
7-5. Calibrator to 5790A AC Measurement Standard Connections .............................. 7-18
7-7. AC Frequency
7-12. HP 437B Power Meter to the HP 8482A or 8481D Power Sensor Connections ... 7-43
7-13. Calibrator to the HP Power Meter and Power Sensor Connections ....................... 7-43
x
Chapter 1
Introduction and Specifications
Introduction
Warning
To prevent possible electrical shock, fire, or personal injury, read all safety information before you use the Product.
The 5502A Calibrator (the Product or the Calibrator), shown in Figure 1-1 is a fully programmable precision source for:
• DC voltage from 0 V to ±1020 V.
• AC voltage from 1 mV to 1020 V, with output from 10 Hz to 500 kHz.
• AC current from 29 μA to 20.5 A, with variable frequency limits.
• DC current from 0 to ±20.5 A.
• Resistance values from a short circuit to 1100 MΩ.
• Capacitance values from 220 pF to 110 mF.
• Simulated output for eight types of Resistance Temperature Detectors
(RTDs).
• Simulated output for eleven types of thermocouples.
1-1
5502A
Service Manual
5502A
CALIBRATOR
1
+ /
7
4
STBY
OPR
8
5
2
0
9
6
3
•
EARTH SCOPE p m n k p
M
TRIG
OUT dBm
V
W
A
PREV
MENU sec
Hz
F
C
F
SHIFT ENTER
SETUP
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
RESET
CE
ZERO
CAL
DIV
EDIT
FIELD
POWER hvw001.eps
Figure 1-1. 5502A Multi-Product Calibrator
Features of the Calibrator include:
• Calculates meter errors automatically, with user selectable reference values.
• and keys that change the output value to pre-determined cardinal values for various functions.
• Programmable entry limits that prevent operator entries that are more than preset output limits.
• Output of voltage and current at the same time, to a maximum equivalent of
20.9 kW.
• Pressure measurement when used with Fluke 700 Series pressure modules.
• 10 MHz reference input and output. Use this to input a high-accuracy 10 MHz reference to transfer the frequency accuracy to the 5502A, or have one or more Calibrators that are synchronized to a master 5502A.
• Output of two voltages at the same time.
• Extended bandwidth mode outputs multiple waveforms down to 0.01 Hz, and sine waves to 2 MHz.
• Variable phase signal output.
• Standard IEEE-488 (GPIB) interface, that complies with ANSI/IEEE
Standards 488.1-1987 and 488.2-1987.
• EIA Standard RS-232 serial data interface to print or transfer internally stored calibration constants, and for remote control of the 5502A.
• Pass-through RS-232 serial data interface to communicate with the Unit
Under Test (UUT).
1-2
Safety Information
1
Safety Information
A Warning identifies conditions and procedures that are dangerous to the user.
A Caution identifies conditions and procedures that can cause damage to the
Product or the equipment under test.
Symbols used in this manual and on the Product are explained in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1. Symbols
Symbol Description Symbol Description
CAT I
IEC Measurement Category I – CAT I is for measurements not directly connected to mains. Maximum transient
Overvoltage is as specified by terminal markings.
Conforms to European Union directives.
Risk of Danger. Important information.
See manual.
Earth ground
Conforms to relevant North American
Safety Standards.
Do not dispose of this product as unsorted municipal waste. Go to the
Fluke Calibration website for recycling information.
Hazardous voltage
Conforms to relevant Australian EMC requirements.
Warning
To prevent possible electrical shock, fire, or personal injury:
• Use the Product only as specified, or the protection
supplied by the Product can be compromised.
• Carefully read all instructions.
• Do not use the Product around explosive gas, vapor, or in
damp or wet environments.
• Use this Product indoors only.
• Do not touch voltages > 30 V ac rms, 42 V ac peak, or
60 V dc.
• Do not use the Product if it operates incorrectly.
• Do not use and disable the Product if it is damaged.
• Use only cables with correct voltage ratings.
• Use only the mains power cord and connector approved for
the voltage and plug configuration in your country and rated for the Product.
• Make sure the ground conductor in the mains power cord is
connected to a protective earth ground. Disruption of the protective earth could put voltage on the chassis that could cause death.
1-3
5502A
Service Manual
• Replace the mains power cord if the insulation is damaged
or if the insulation shows signs of wear.
• Do not connect directly to mains.
• Do not use an extension cord or adapter plug.
• For safe operation and maintenance of the Product, make
sure that the space around the Product meets minimum requirements.
This Calibrator complies with:
• CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1-04
• ANSI/IEEE Standards 488.1-1987 and 488.2-1987.
Overload Protection
The Calibrator supplies reverse-power protection, fast output disconnection, and/or fuse protection on the output terminals for all functions.
Reverse-power protection prevents damage to the calibrator from occasional, accidental, normal-mode, and common-mode overloads to a maximum of
±300 V peak. It is not intended as protection against frequent (systematic and repeated) abuse. Such abuse will cause the Calibrator to fail.
For volts, ohms, capacitance, and thermocouple functions, there is fast output disconnection protection. This protection senses applied voltages higher than
20 volts on the output terminals. It quickly disconnects the internal circuits from the output terminals and resets the calibrator when such overloads occur.
For current and aux voltage functions, user replaceable fuses supply protection from overloads applied to the Current/Aux Voltage output terminals. The fuses are accessed by an access door on the bottom of the calibrator. You must use replacement fuses of the same capacity and type specified in this manual, or the protection supplied by the Calibrator will be compromised.
Operation Overview
The Calibrator can be operated at the front panel in the local mode, or remotely through the RS-232 or IEEE-488 ports. For remote operations, there are a number of software options available to integrate 5502A operation into a wide variety of calibration requirements.
Local Operation
Typical local operations include front panel connections to the Unit Under Test
(UUT), and then manual keystroke entries at the front panel to set the output mode of the Calibrator. You can review Calibrator specifications at the push of two buttons. The backlit liquid crystal display is easy to see from many different angles and light conditions. The large, easy-to-read keys are color-coded and supply tactile feedback.
Remote Operation (RS-232)
There are two rear-panel serial data RS-232 ports: SERIAL 1 FROM HOST, and
SERIAL 2 TO UUT (see Figure 1-2). Each port is dedicated to serial data
1-4
Operation Overview
1 communications to operate and control the 5502A when you do calibration procedures. For complete information on remote operations, see Chapter 5 of the
5502A Operators Manual.
The SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial data port connects a host terminal or personal computer to the Calibrator. You can send remote commands to the Calibrator from a terminal (or a PC running a terminal program), a BASIC program you write, or an optional Windows-based software such as 5500/CAL or MET/CAL.
The 5500/CAL Software includes more than 200 example procedures that include a wide range of test tools the Product can calibrate. (See Chapter 6 of the 5502A Operators Manual for a discussion of the RS-232 commands.)
The SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial data port connects a UUT to a PC or terminal through the Product (see Figure 1-2). This “pass-through” configuration removes the requirement for two COM ports at the PC or terminal. A set of four commands control the operation of the SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port. See Chapter 6 of the
5502A Operators Manual for a discussion of the UUT_* commands. The SERIAL
2 TO UUT port is also used to connect to the Fluke 700 Series Pressure
Modules.
5502A CALIBRATOR
+
STBY OPR
7
4
1
5
2
0
8
•
3
9
6
EARTH SCOPE TRIG
OUT dBm
V
W
A
PREV
MENU sec
Hz
¡F
¡C p
M m n k
SHIFT ENTER
F
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
CE
ZERO
CAL
MULT x
DIV
EDIT
FIELD
5502A
POWER
RS-232 Remote Operation using the
SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port
SERIAL 2
TO UUT port
SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port
COM port
SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port
COM port
5502A CALIBRATOR
+
STBY
OPR
4
1
7
2
0
8
5
EARTH SCOPE TRIG
OUT
6
3
•
9 n k p
M m
SHIFT dBm
V
W
A
PREV
MENU
ENTER
F sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
SETUP
RESET
NEW
REF
CE
MEAS
TC
MULT x
ZERO
CAL
DIV
EDIT
FIELD
5502A
POWER
PC or Terminal
PC or Terminal
Unit Under Test
RS-232 Remote Operation using the
SERIAL 1 FROM HOST and
SERIAL 2 TO UUT ports
gvx002.eps
Figure 1-2. RS-232 Remote Connection
Remote Operation (IEEE-488)
The rear panel IEEE-488 port is a fully programmable parallel interface bus that operates to IEEE-488.1 and IEEE-488.2 (supplement) standards. When controlled remotely by an instrument controller, the Calibrator operates exclusively as a “talker/listener.” You can write your own programs with commands from the IEEE-488 command set or run the optional Windows-based
1-5
5502A
Service Manual
MET/CAL software. (See Chapter 6 of the 5502A Operators Manual for a discussion of the commands available for IEEE-488 operation.)
Service Information
If you have a problem with the Calibrator in the 1-year warranty period, send it to a Fluke Service Center for warranty repair. For out of warranty repair, get in touch with a Fluke Service Center for a cost estimate.
This service manual gives instructions for verification of performance, calibration, and maintenance. If you choose to repair a malfunction, information in this manual can help you find which module (printed circuit assembly) has a fault.
1-6
How to Contact Fluke Calibration
1
How to Contact Fluke Calibration
To contact Fluke Calibration, call one of the following telephone numbers:
• Technical Support USA: 1-877-355-3225
• Calibration/Repair USA: 1-877-355-3225
• Canada: 1-800-36-FLUKE (1-800-363-5853)
• China: +86-400-810-3435
• Brazil: +55-11-3759-7600
• Anywhere in the world: +1-425-446-6110
To see product information and download the latest manual supplements, visit
Fluke Calibration’s website at www.flukecal.com.
To register your product, visit http://flukecal.com/register-product.
General Specifications
The following tables list the 5502A specifications. All specifications are valid after allowing a warm-up period of
30 minutes, or twice the time the 5502A has been turned off. (For example, if the 5502A has been turned off for
5 minutes, the warm-up period is 10 minutes.)
All specifications apply for the temperature and time period indicated. For temperatures outside of tcal ±5 °C (tcal is the ambient temperature when the 5502A was calibrated), the temperature coefficient as stated in the General Specifications must be applied.
The specifications also assume the Calibrator is zeroed every seven days or whenever the ambient temperature changes more than 5 °C. The tightest ohms specifications are maintained with a zero cal every 12 hours within ±1 °C of use.
Also see additional specifications later in this chapter for information on extended specifications for ac voltage and current.
Warmup Time ........................................................ Twice the time since last warmed up, to a maximum of 30 minutes.
Settling Time ......................................................... Less than 5 seconds for all functions and ranges except as noted.
Standard Interfaces .............................................. IEEE-488 (GPIB), RS-232
Temperature
Operating ............................................................ 0
°C to 50 °C
Calibration (tcal) .................................................. 15 °C to 35 °C
Storage ............................................................... -20 °C to +70 °C; The DC current ranges 0 to 1.09999 A and 1.1 A to
2.99999 A are sensitive to storage temperatures above 50 °C. If the
5502A is stored above 50
°C for greater than 30 minutes, these ranges must be re-calibrated. Otherwise, the 90 day and 1 year uncertainties of these ranges double.
Temperature Coefficient ....................................... Temperature coefficient for temperatures outside of tcal ±5
°C is 10 % of the stated specification per °C.
1-7
5502A
Service Manual
Relative Humidity
Operating ............................................................ <80 % to 30 °C, <70 % to 40 °C, <40 % to 50 °C
Storage ............................................................... <95 %, non-condensing. After long periods of storage at high humidity, a drying-out period (with power on) of at least one week may be required.
Altitude
Operating ............................................................ 3,050 m (10,000 ft) maximum at ≤120 V line voltage operation
2,000 m (6,500 ft) maximum at
>120 V line voltage operation
Non-operating ..................................................... 12,200 m (40,000 ft) maximum
Safety ..................................................................... IEC 61010-1: Overvoltage CAT II, Pollution Degree 2
Output Terminal Electrical Overload Protection Provides reverse-power protection, immediate output disconnection, and/or fuse protection on the output terminals for all functions. This protection is for applied external voltages up to ±300 V peak.
Analog Low Isolation ............................................ 20 V normal operation, 400 V peak transient
Electromagnetic Environment ............................. IEC 61326-1: Controlled
Electromagnetic Compatibility ............................ If used in areas with electromagnetic fields of 1 V/m to 3 V/m from
0.08 GHz to 1 GHz, resistance outputs have a floor adder of 0.508
Ω.
Performance not specified above 3 V/m. This instrument may be susceptible to electro-static discharge (ESD) to the binding posts.
Good static awareness practices should be followed when handling this and other pieces of electronic equipment. Additionally, this instrument may be susceptible to electrical fast transients on the mains terminals. If any disturbances in operation are observed, it is recommended that the rear-panel chassis ground terminal be connected to a known good earth ground with a low-inductance ground strap. Note that a mains power outlet, while providing a suitable ground for protection against electric shock hazard, may not provide an adequate ground to properly drain away conducted rf disturbances and may, in fact, be the source of the disturbance. This instrument was certified for EMC performance with data I/O cables not in excess of 3 m.
Line Power ............................................................. Line Voltage (selectable): 100 V, 120 V, 220 V, 240 V
Line Frequency: 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Line Voltage Variation:
±10 % about line voltage setting.
For optimal performance at full dual outputs (e.g. 1000 V,
20 A) choose a line voltage setting that is ±7.5 % from nominal.
Power Consumption ............................................. 600 VA
Dimensions (HxWxL) ............................................ 17.8 cm x 43.2 cm x 47.3 cm (7 in x 17 in x 18.6 in) Standard rack width and rack increment, plus 1.5 cm (0.6 in) for feet on bottom of unit.
Weight (without options) ...................................... 22 kg (49 lb)
Absolute Uncertainty Definition .......................... The 5502A specifications include stability, temperature coefficient, linearity, line and load regulation, and the traceability of the external standards used for calibration. You do not need to add anything to determine the total specification of the 5502A for the temperature range indicated.
Specification Confidence Level ........................... 99 %
1-8
Detailed Specifications
1
Detailed Specifications
DC Voltage
Range
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ± 5
°C
±(% of output +
μV)
90 Day 1 Year
Stability
24 hours, ± 1
°C
±(ppm of output +
μV)
Resolution (µV) Max Burden
[1]
0 to 329.9999 mV
0 to 3.299999 V
0 to 32.99999 V
30 to 329.9999 V
100 to 1020.000 V
0.005 + 3
0.004 + 5
0.004 + 50
0.0045 + 500
0.006 + 3
0.005 + 5
0.005 + 50
0.0055 + 500
5 + 1
4 + 3
4 + 30
4.5 + 300
0.0045 + 1500 0.0055 + 1500 4.5 + 900
Auxiliary Output (dual output mode only)
[2]
0.03 + 350 0.04 + 350 30 + 100 0 to 329.999 mV
0.33 to 3.29999 V
3.3 to 7 V
0.03 + 350 0.04 + 350 30 + 100
0.03 + 350 0.04 + 350 30 + 100
TC Simulate and Measure in Linear 10
μV/°C and 1 mV/°C modes
[3]
0 to 329.9999 mV 0.005 + 3 0.006 + 3 5 + 1
[1] Remote sensing is not provided. Output resistance is < 5 m Ω for outputs ≥ 0.33 V. The AUX output has an output resistance of
<1 Ω. TC simulation has an output impedance of 10 Ω ± 1 Ω.
[2] Two channels of dc voltage output are provided.
[3] TC simulating and measuring are not specified for operation in electromagnetic fields above 0.4 V/m.
Noise
0 to 3.299999 V
0 to 32.99999 V
30 to 329.9999 V
100 to 1020.000 V
0 to 329.999 mV
0.33 to 3.29999 V
3.3 to 7 V
Range
0 to 329.9999 mV
Bandwidth 0.1 Hz to 10 Hz p-p
±(ppm of output + floor in μV)
0 + 1
0 + 10
0 + 100
10 + 1000
10 + 5000
Auxiliary Output (dual output mode only)
[1]
Bandwidth 10 Hz to 10 kHz rms
6 μV
60
μV
600 μV
20 mV
20 mV
0 + 5
μV 20
0 + 20 μV 200
0 + 100
μV 1000
[1] Two channels of dc voltage output are provided.
1-9
5502A
Service Manual
DC Current
Range
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±5 °C
±(% of output +μA)
90 Day 1 Year
Resolution
Max Compliance
Voltage V
Max Inductive
Load mH
0 to 329.999 μA
0 to 3.29999 mA
0 to 32.9999 mA
0 to 329.999 mA
0 to 1.09999 A
1.1 to 2.99999 A
0.012 + 0.02
0.010 + 0.05
0.008 + 0.25
0.008 + 3.3
0.023 + 44
0.030 + 44
0.015 + 0.02
0.013 + 0.05
0.010 + 0.25
0.010 + 2.5
0.038 + 44
0.038 + 44
1 nA
0.01
μA
0.1
μA
1 μA
10
μA
10 μA
10
10
7
7
6
6
400
0 to 10.9999 A
(20 A Range)
11 to 20.5 A
[1]
0.038 + 500
0.080 + 750
[2]
0.060 + 500
0.10 + 750
[2]
100 μA
100 μA
4
4
[1] Duty Cycle: Currents <11 A may be provided continuously. For currents >11 A, see Figure 1. The current may be provided
Formula 60-T-I minutes any 60 minute period where T is the temperature in
°C (room temperature is about 23 °C) and I is the output current in amperes. For example, 17 A, at 23 °C could be provided for 60-23-17 = 20 minutes each hour. When the 5502A is outputting currents between 5 and 11 amps for long periods, the internal self-heating reduces the duty cycle. Under those conditions, the allowable "on" time indicated by the formula and Figure 1 is achieved only after the 5502A is outputting currents
<5 A for the "off" period first.
[2] Floor specification is 1500 μA within 30 seconds of selecting operate. For operating times >30 seconds, the floor specification is
750 μA.
Noise
Range
Bandwidth 0.1 Hz to 10 Hz p-p Bandwidth 10 Hz to 10 kHz rms
0 to 329.999
μA
0 to 3.29999 mA
0 to 32.9999 mA
0 to 329.999 mA
0 to 2.99999 A
0 to 20.5 A
2 nA
20 nA
200 nA
2000 nA
20
μA
200 μA
20 nA
200 nA
2.0
μA
20 μA
1 mA
10 mA
50
45
40
Ambient
0
°C
80%
70%
60%
35
10
°C
50%
30
25
20
°C
40%
20
15
30
°C
30%
20%
10
40
°C
10%
5
0
11 12 13 14 15 16
Current (Amps)
17 18 19 20
0%
Figure 1. Allowable Duration of Current >11 A
1-10
DC Current
1
Resistance
Range
[1]
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±5 °C ±(% of output + floor)
[2]
% of output
Floor (
Ω) Time and temp since ohms
zero cal
Resolution
(
Ω)
Allowable Current
(A)
[3]
0 to 10.999
Ω
11 to 32.999 Ω
33 to
109.999 Ω
110 to
329.999
Ω
330 to
1.09999 k
Ω
1.1 to
3.29999 k Ω
3.3 to
10.9999 k Ω
11 to
32.9999 k
Ω
33 to
109.999 k
Ω
110 to
329.999 k Ω
330 k
Ω to
1.09999 M Ω
1.1 to
3.29999 M
Ω
3.3 to
10.9999 M
Ω
11 to
32.9999 M Ω
33 to
109.999 M Ω
110 to
329.999 M
Ω
330 to
1100.00 M
Ω
90 Day
0.009
0.009
0.007
0.007
0.007
0.007
0.007
0.007
0.008
0.009
0.011
0.011
0.045
0.075
0.4
0.4
1.2
1 Year
0.012
0.012
0.009
0.009
0.009
0.009
0.009
0.009
0.011
0.012
0.015
0.015
0.06
0.1
0.5
0.5
1.5
12 hrs
±1 °C 7 ±5 °C
0.001
0.0015
0.0014
0.002
0.002
2500
3000
100000
500000
0. 01
0.015
0.015
0.02
0.02
2500
3000
100000
500000
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.01
100
1000
1000
10000
1 mA to 125 mA
1 mA to 125 mA
1 mA to 70 mA
1 mA to 40 mA
1 mA to 18 mA
10
100
μA
μA
25 nA to 500 nA
25 nA to 180 nA
2.5 nA to 50 nA
1 nA to 13 nA
[1] Continuously variable from 0
Ω to 1.1 GΩ.
[2] Applies for 4-WIRE compensation only. For 2-WIRE and 2-WIRE COMP, add 5 μV per amp of stimulus current to the floor specification. For example, in 2-WIRE mode, at 1 k Ω the floor specification within 12 hours of an ohms zero cal for a measurement current of 1 mA is: 0.002 Ω + 5 μV / 1 mA = (0.002 + 0.005) Ω = 0.007 Ω.
[3] Do not exceed the largest current for each range. For currents lower than shown, the floor adder increases by Floor
(new)
= Floor
(old)
x
I min
/I actual
. For example, a 50 μA stimulus measuring 100 Ω has a floor specification of: 0.0014 Ω x 1 mA/50 μA = 0.028 Ω, assuming an ohms zero calibration within 12 hours.
1-11
5502A
Service Manual
AC Voltage (Sine Wave)
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
Range Frequency
±5 °C ±
(% of output +
μV)
90 Day 1 Year
Max Distortion and
Noise 10 Hz to
Burden 5 MHz Bandwidth
±(% of output +
floor)
1.0 to
32.999 mV
33 mV to
329.999 mV
0.33 V to
3.29999 V
3.3 V to
32.9999 V
33 V to
329.999 V
330 V to
1020 V
10 Hz to 45 Hz
0.120 + 20 0.150 + 20
45 Hz to 10 kHz
10 kHz to 20 kHz
0.080 + 20
0.120 + 20
0.160 + 20
0.100 + 20
0.150 + 20
0.200 + 20 20 kHz to 50 kHz
50 kHz to 100 kHz
100 kHz to 500 kHz
0.300 + 33 0.350 + 33
10 Hz to 45 Hz
0.750 + 60
0.042 + 20
1.000 + 60
0.050 + 20
45 Hz to 10 kHz
10 kHz to 20 kHz
0.029 + 20
0.066 + 20
0.030 + 20
0.070 + 20
20 kHz to 50 kHz
0.086 + 40 0.100 + 40
50 kHz to 100 kHz
0.173 + 170 0.230 + 170
100 kHz to 500 kHz 0.400 + 330
0.500 + 330
10 Hz to 45 Hz
0.042 + 60 0.050 + 60
45 Hz to 10 kHz
0.028 + 60 0.030 + 60
10 kHz to 20 kHz
20 kHz to 50 kHz
0.059 + 60
0.083 + 60
0.070 + 60
0.100 + 60
50 kHz to 100 kHz 0.181 + 200 0.230 + 200
100 kHz to 500 kHz 0.417 + 900
0.500 + 900
10 Hz to 45 Hz 0.042 + 800 0.050 + 800
45 Hz to 10 kHz
10 kHz to 20 kHz
0.025 + 600 0.030 + 600
0.064 + 600 0.070 + 600
20 kHz to 50 kHz 0.086 + 600 0.100 + 600
50 kHz to 100 kHz 0.192 + 2000 0.230 + 2000
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 10 kHz
10 kHz to 20 kHz
20 kHz to 50 kHz
0.039 + 3000
0.064 + 9000
0.079 + 9000
0.096 + 9000
0.050 + 3000
0.080 + 9000
0.090 + 9000
0.120 + 9000
50 kHz to 100 kHz 0.192 + 80000 0.240 + 80000
45 Hz to 1 kHz 0.042 + 20000 0.050 + 20000
1 kHz to 5 kHz
5 kHz to 10 kHz
0.064 + 20000 0.080 + 20000
0.075 + 20000 0.090 + 20000
0.15 + 90 μV
0.035 + 90
μV
1
μV 65
0.06 + 90
μV
0.15 + 90 μV
0.25 + 90
μV
0.3 + 90
μV
[1]
0.15 + 90 μV
0.035 + 90
μV
1 μV 65
0.06 + 90 μV
0.15 + 90
μV
0.2 + 90 μV
0.2 + 90
μV
[1]
0.15 + 200
μV
10
μV 10 mA
0.035 + 200 μV
0.06 + 200
μV
0.15 + 200
μV
0.2 + 200 μV
0.2 + 200 μV
[1]
0.15 + 2 mV
100
μV 10 mA
0.035 + 2 mV
0.08 + 2 mV
0.2 + 2 mV
0.5 + 2 mV
1 mV
5 mA, except
20 mA for
45 Hz to
65 Hz
0.15 + 10 mV
0.05 +10 mV
0.6 + 10 mV
0.8 + 10 mV
10 mV
2 mA, except
6 mA for 45 to
65 Hz
1 + 10 mV
0.15 + 30 mV
0.07 + 30 mV
0.07 + 30 mV
[1] Max Distortion for 100 kHz to 200 kHz. For 200 kHz to 500 kHz, the maximum distortion is 0.9 % of output + floor as shown.
Note
Remote sensing is not provided. Output resistance is <5 m
Ω for outputs ≥0.33 V. The AUX output resistance is <1 Ω. The maximum load capacitance is 500 pF, subject to the maximum burden current limits.
1-12
DC Current
1
AC Voltage (Sine Wave) (cont.)
AUX (Auxiliary Output) [dual output mode only]
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±5 °C ±(% of output + μV)
90 Day 1 Year
Max Distortion and
Burden
Noise 10 Hz to
5 MHz Bandwidth
±(% of output +
floor)
1.0 to
329.999 mV
0.33 to
3.29999 V
3.3 to 5 V
10 to 20 Hz
20 to 45 Hz
45 to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
10 to 30 kHz
10 to 20 Hz
20 to 45 Hz
45 to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
10 to 30 kHz
10 to 20 Hz
20 to 45 Hz
45 to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
0.15 + 370
0.08 + 370
0.08 + 370
0.15 + 450
0.30 + 450
4.00 + 900
0.15 + 450
0.08 + 450
0.07 + 450
0.15 + 1400
0.30 + 1400
4.00 + 2800
0.15 + 450
0.08 + 450
0.07 + 450
0.15 + 1400
0.30 + 1400
0.20 + 370
0.10 + 370
0.10 + 370
0.20 + 450
0.40 + 450
5.00 + 900
0.20 + 450
0.10 + 450
0.09 + 450
0.20 + 1400
0.40 + 1400
5.00 + 2800
0.20 + 450
0.10 + 450
0.09 + 450
0.20 + 1400
0.40 + 1400
1 μV
10
100
μV
μV
5 mA
5 mA
5 mA
0.20 + 200
μV
0.06 + 200 μV
0.08 + 200
μV
0.30 + 200 μV
0.60 + 200
μV
1.00 + 200 μV
0.20 + 200
μV
0.06 + 200 μV
0.08 + 200
μV
0.30 + 200 μV
0.60 + 200 μV
1.00 + 200
μV
0.20 + 200 μV
0.06 + 200
μV
0.08 + 200 μV
0.30 + 200
μV
0.60 + 200 μV
[1] There are two channels of voltage output. The maximum frequency of the dual output is 30 kHz.
Note
Remote sensing is not provided. Output resistance is <5 m Ω for outputs ≥0.33 V. The AUX output resistance is <1 Ω. The maximum load capacitance is 500 pF, subject to the maximum burden current limits.
1-13
5502A
Service Manual
AC Current (Sine Wave)
Range Frequency
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
Absolute Uncertainty,
tcal
±5 °C ±
(% of output +
μA)
0.15 + 100
0.05 + 100
0.5 + 1000
2.0 + 5000
0.18 + 100
0.06 + 100
0.6 + 1000
2.5 + 5000
Compliance adder
±(μA/V)
Max Distortion and Noise 10 Hz to 100 kHz BW
±(% of output +
floor)
Max
Inductive
Load
μH
29 to
329.99
μA
0.33 to
3.29999 mA
3.3 to
32.9999 mA
33 to
329.999 mA
0.33 to
1.09999 A
1.1 to
2.99999 A
3 to 10.9999 A
11 to 20.5 A
[1]
10 to 20 Hz
20 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
10 to 30 kHz
10 to 20 Hz
20 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
10 to 30 kHz
10 to 20 Hz
20 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
10 to 30 kHz
10 to 20 Hz
20 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
10 to 30 kHz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
45 to 100 Hz
100 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 5 kHz
45 to 100 Hz
100 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
90 Day
0.16 + 0.1
0.12 + 0.1
0.1 + 0.1
0.25 + 0.15
0.6 + 0.2
1.2 + 0.4
0.16 + 0.15
0.1 + 0.15
0.08 + 0.15
0.16 + 0.2
0.4 + 0.3
0.8 + 0.6
0.15 + 2
0.075 + 2
0.035 + 2
0.065 + 2
0.16 + 3
0.32 + 4
0.15 + 20
0.075 + 20
0.035 + 20
0.08 + 50
0.16 + 100
0.32 + 200
0.15 + 100
0.036 + 100
0.5 + 1000
2.0 + 5000
0.05 + 2000
0.08 + 2000
2.5 + 2000
0.1 + 5000
0.13 + 5000
2.5 + 5000
1 Year
LCOMP Off
0.2 + 0.1
0.15 + 0.1
0.125 + 0.1
0.3 + 0.15
0.8 + 0.2
1.6 + 0.4
0.2 + 0.15
0.125 + 0.15
0.1 + 0.15
0.2 + 0.2
0.5 + 0.3
1.0 + 0.6
0.18 + 2
0.09 + 2
0.04 + 2
0.08 + 2
0.2 + 3
0.4 + 4
0.18 + 20
0.09 + 20
0.04 + 20
0.10 + 50
0.2 + 100
0.4 + 200
0.18 + 100
0.05 + 100
0.6 + 1000
2.5 + 5000
0.06 + 2000
0.10 + 2000
3.0 + 2000
0.12 + 5000
0.15 + 5000
3.0 + 5000
0.05
0.05
0.05
1.5
1.5
10
0.05
0.05
0.05
1.5
1.5
10
0.05
0.05
0.05
1.5
1.5
10
0.05
0.05
0.05
1.5
1.5
10
[2]
[3]
[2]
[3]
0.15 + 0.5
μA
0.10 + 0.5
μA
0.05 + 0.5
μA
0.50 + 0.5
μA
1.00 + 0.5
μA
1.20 + 0.5
μA
0.15 + 1.5
μA
0.06 + 1.5 μA
0.02 + 1.5 μA
0.50 + 1.5 μA
1.00 + 1.5 μA
1.20 + 0.5 μA
0.15 + 5 μA
0.05 + 5
μA
0.07 + 5
μA
0.30 + 5
μA
0.70 + 5
μA
1.00 + 0.5
μA
0.15 + 50
μA
0.05 + 50
μA
0.02 + 50 μA
0.03 + 50 μA
0.10 + 50 μA
0.60 + 50 μA
0.20 + 500 μA
0.07 + 500 μA
1.00 + 500 μA
2.00 + 500 μA
0.20 + 500
μA
0.07 + 500
μA
1.00 + 500 μA
2.00 + 500
μA
0.2 + 3 mA
0.1 + 3 mA
0.8 + 3 mA
0.2 + 3 mA
0.1 + 3 mA
0.8 + 3 mA
200
200
50
50
2.5
2.5
1
1
[1] Duty Cycle: Currents <11 A may be provided continuously. For currents >11 A, see Figure 1. The current may be provided
60-T-I minutes any 60 minute period where T is the temperature in
°C (room temperature is about 23 °C) and I is the output current in amps. For example, 17 A, at 23
°C could be provided for 60-17-23 = 20 minutes each hour. When the 5502A is outputting currents between 5 and 11 amps for long periods, the internal self-heating reduces the duty cycle. Under those conditions, the allowable "on" time indicated by the formula and Figure 1 is achieved only after the 5502A is outputting currents <5 A for the "off" period first.
[2] For compliance voltages greater than 1 V, add 1 mA/V to the floor specification from 1 to 5 kHz.
[3] For compliance voltages greater than 1 V, add 5 mA/V to the floor specification from 5 to 10 kHz.
1-14
DC Current
1
AC Current (Sine Wave) (cont.)
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
90 Day 1 Year
Max Distortion and
Noise 10 Hz to
100 kHz BW
±(% of
output + floor)
Max Inductive Load
29 to 329.99
330
μA to
3.3 to
330 mA to
2.99999 A
μA
3.29999 mA
32.9999 mA
33 to 329.999 mA
3.3 A to 20.5 A
[1]
10 to 100 Hz
100 Hz to 1 kHz
10 to 100 Hz
100 Hz to 1 kHz
10 to 100 Hz
100 Hz to 1 kHz
10 to 100 Hz
100 Hz to 1 kHz
10 to 100 Hz
100 to 440 Hz
45 to 100 Hz
100 to 440 Hz
0.20 + 0.2
0.50 + 0.5
0.20 + 0.3
0.50 + 0.8
0.07 + 4
0.18 + 10
0.07 + 40
0.18 + 100
0.10 + 200
0.25 + 1000
0.10 + 2000
[2]
0.80 + 5000
[3]
LCOMP On
0.25 + 0.2
0.60 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.3
0.60 + 0.8
0.08 + 4
0.20 + 10
0.08 + 40
0.20 + 100
0.12 + 200
0.30 + 1000
0.12 + 2000
[2]
1.00 + 5000
[3]
0.1 + 1.0
μA
0.05 + 1.0 μA
0.15 + 1.5 μA
0.06 + 1.5
μA
0.15 + 5
μA
0.05 + 5
μA
0.15 + 50
μA
0.05 + 50 μA
0.2 + 500 μA
0.25 + 500 μA
0.1 + 0
μA
0.5 + 0
μA
400
400
μH
μH
[4]
[1] Duty Cycle: Currents <11 A may be provided continuously. For currents >11 A, see Figure 1. The current may be provided
60-T-I minutes any 60 minute period where T is the temperature in
°C (room temperature is about 23 °C) and I is the output current in amps. For example, 17 A, at 23 °C could be provided for 60-17-23 = 20 minutes each hour. When the 5502A is outputting currents between 5 and 11 amps for long periods, the internal self-heating reduces the duty cycle. Under those conditions, the allowable "on" time indicated by the formula and Figure 1 is achieved only after the 5502A is outputting currents <5 A for the "off" period first.
[2] For currents >11 A, Floor specification is 4000
μA within 30 seconds of selecting operate. For operating times >30 seconds, the floor specification is 2000 μA.
[3] For currents >11 A, Floor specification is 10000 μA within 30 seconds of selecting operate. For operating times >30 seconds, the floor specification is 5000 μA.
[4] Subject compliance voltages limits.
Range
29 to 329.99
μA
0.33 to 3.29999 mA
3.3 to 32.9999 mA
33 to 329.999 mA
0.33 to 2.99999 A
3 to 20.5 A
Resolution
μA
Max Compliance Voltage V rms
[1]
0.01 7
0.01
0.1
1
7
5
5
10
100
[1] Subject to specification adder for compliance voltages greater than 1 V rms.
4
3
1-15
5502A
Service Manual
Capacitance
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±5 °C
±(% of output + floor)
[1] [2] [3]
Range
90 Day 1 Year
Resolution
Allowed Frequency or Charge-Discharge Rate
Min and Max to
Meet
Specification
Typical Max for
<0.5 % Error
Typical Max for
<1 % Error
220.0 to
399.9 pF
0.38 + 0.01 nF 0.5 + 0.01 nF
0.4 to 1.0999 nF 0.38 + 0.01 nF 0.5 + 0.01 nF
1.1 to 3.2999 nF 0.38 + 0.01 nF 0.5 + 0.01 nF
3.3 to 10.999 nF 0.19 + 0.01 nF 0.25 + 0.01 nF
11 to 32.999 nF 0.19 + 0.1 nF 0.25 + 0.1 nF
0.1 pF
0.1 pF
0.1 pF
1 pF
1 pF
10 Hz to 10 kHz
10 Hz to 10 kHz
10 Hz to 3 kHz
10 Hz to 1 kHz
10 Hz to 1 kHz
20 kHz
30 kHz
30 kHz
20 kHz
8 kHz
40 kHz
50 kHz
50 kHz
25 kHz
10 kHz
33 to 109.99 nF 0.19 + 0.1 nF 0.25 + 0.1 nF
110 to 329.99 nF 0.19 + 0.3 nF 0.25 + 0.3 nF
10 pF
10 pF
10 Hz to 1 kHz
10 Hz to 1 kHz
4 kHz
2.5 kHz
6 kHz
3.5 kHz
0.33 to
1.0999
μF
0.19 + 1 nF
1.1 to 3.2999
μF 0.19 + 3 nF
3.3 to 10.999
μF 0.19 + 10 nF
0.25 + 1 nF
0.25 + 3 nF
0.25 + 10 nF
11 to 32.999 μF 0.30 + 30 nF
33 to 109.99 μF 0.34 + 100 nF 0.45 + 100 nF
110 to 329.99
μF 0.34 + 300 nF
0.45 + 300 nF
0.33 to
1.0999 mF
0.34 + 1 μF
0.40 + 30 nF
0.45 + 1 μF
100 pF
100 pF
1 nF
1 nF
10 nF
10 nF
100 nF
10 to 600 Hz
10 to 300 Hz
10 to 150 Hz
10 to 120 Hz
10 to 80 Hz
0 to 50 Hz
0 to 20 Hz
1.5 kHz
800 Hz
450 Hz
250 Hz
150 Hz
80 Hz
45 Hz
2 kHz
1 kHz
650 Hz
350 Hz
200 Hz
120 Hz
65 Hz
1.1 to 3.2999 mF
0.34 + 3
μF
3.3 to 10.999 mF 0.34 + 10 μF
0.45 + 3
μF 100 nF
0.45 + 10 μF 1
11 to 32.999 mF
33 to 110.00 mF
0.7 + 30 μF
1.0 + 100 μF
0.75 + 30 μF 1
1.1 + 100 μF 10
[1] The output is continuously variable from 220 pF to 110 mF.
0 to 6 Hz
0 to 2 Hz
0 to 0.6 Hz
0 to 0.2 Hz
30 Hz
15 Hz
7.5 Hz
3 Hz
40 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
5 Hz
[2] Specifications apply to both dc charge/discharge capacitance meters and ac RCL meters. The maximum allowable peak voltage is
3 V. The maximum allowable peak current is 150 mA, with an rms limitation of 30 mA below 1.1 μF and 100 mA for 1.1 μF and above.
[3] The maximum lead resistance for no additional error in 2-wire COMP mode is 10 Ω.
1-16
Temperature Calibration (Thermocouple)
TC Type
[1]
B
C
Range
°C
[2]
600 to 800
800 to 1000
1000 to 1550
1550 to 1820
0 to 150
150 to 650
650 to 1000
1000 to 1800
1800 to 2316
Absolute Uncertainty
Source/Measure tcal
±5 °C ±
°C
[3]
90 Day 1 Year
0.42
0.34
0.30
0.26
0.23
0.19
0.23
0.38
0.63
0.44
0.34
0.30
0.33
0.30
0.26
0.31
0.50
0.84
TC
Type
[1]
L
N
Range
°C
[2]
-200 to -100
-100 to 800
800 to 900
-200 to -100
-100 to -25
-25 to 120
120 to 410
410 to 1300
0 to 250
E
J
-250 to -100
-100 to -25
-25 to 350
350 to 650
650 to 1000
-210 to -100
-100 to -30
-30 to 150
150 to 760
760 to 1200
0.38
0.12
0.10
0.12
0.16
0.20
0.12
0.10
0.13
0.18
0.50
0.16
0.14
0.16
0.21
0.27
0.16
0.14
0.17
0.23
R
S
T
250 to 400
400 to 1000
1000 to 1767
0 to 250
250 to 1000
1000 to 1400
1400 to 1767
-250 to -150
-150 to 0
0 to 120
K
-200 to -100
-100 to -25
-25 to 120
0.25
0.14
0.12
0.33
0.18
0.16
U
120 to 400
-200 to 0
0 to 600
120 to 1000
1000 to 1372
0.19
0.30
0.26
0.40
[1] Temperature standard ITS-90 or IPTS-68 is selectable.
TC simulating and measuring are not specified for operation in electromagnetic fields above 0.4 V/m.
[2] Resolution is 0.01
°C
[3] Does not include thermocouple error
0.10
0.56
0.27
0.28
0.26
0.30
0.47
0.30
0.28
0.34
0.48
0.18
0.12
Absolute Uncertainty
Source/Measure tcal
±5 °C ± °C
[3]
90 Day 1 Year
0.37
0.26
0.17
0.30
0.37
0.26
0.17
0.40
0.17
0.15
0.14
0.21
0.48
0.22
0.19
0.18
0.27
0.57
0.35
0.33
0.40
0.47
0.36
0.37
0.46
0.63
0.24
0.16
0.14
0.56
0.27
DC Current
1
1-17
5502A
Service Manual
-200 to -190
-190 to -80
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 260
260 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 600
600 to 630
-200 to -80
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 260
260 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 600
600 to 630
-200 to -80
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 630
630 to 800
-200 to -80
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 630
Temperature Calibration (RTD)
RTD Type
Pt 385,
100
Ω
Pt 3926,
100
Ω
Pt 3916,
100
Ω
Pt 385,
200
Ω
Range
°C
[1]
0.25
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.06
0.07
0.04
0.05
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.10
0.08
0.08
0.21
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.04
0.11
0.12
0.12
0.14
Absolute Uncertainty tcal
±5 °C ± °C
[2]
90 Day 1 Year
0.04
0.05
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.10
0.21
0.05
0.05
0.07
0.09
0.10
0.12
0.23
RTD Type
Pt 385,
500 Ω
0.05
0.05
0.07
0.09
0.10
0.12
0.25
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.10
0.23
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.05
0.12
0.13
0.14
0.16
Pt 385,
1000
Ω
PtNi 385,
120 Ω
(Ni120)
Cu 427
10 Ω
[3]
Range
°C
[1]
-200 to -80
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 260
260 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 600
600 to 630
-200 to -80
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 260
260 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 600
600 to 630
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 260
-100 to 260 0.3
[1] Resolution is 0.003 °C
[2] Applies for COMP OFF (to the 5502A Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals) and 2-wire and 4-wire compensation.
[3] Based on MINCO Application Aid No. 18
0.05
0.06
0.22
0.06
0.07
0.13
0.09
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.05
Absolute Uncertainty tcal
±5 °C ± °C
[2]
90 Day 1 Year
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.07
0.08
0.04
0.05
0.05
0.06
0.08
0.08
0.09
0.07
0.07
0.23
0.08
0.08
0.14
0.11
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.3
Phase
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±5 °C, (Δ Φ °)
Frequency (Hz)
65 to 500 Hz 500 Hz to 1 kHz 1 to 5 kHz 5 to 10 kHz 10 to 65 Hz
0.15
° 0.9
Note
See Power and Dual Output Limit Specifications for applicable outputs.
10 to 30 kHz
1-18
DC Current
1
Phase (
Φ)
Watts
Phase (
Φ)
VARs
PF
Power Uncertainty Adder due to Phase Error
10 to 65 Hz 65 to 500 Hz 500 Hz to 1 kHz 1 to 5 kHz 5 to 10 kHz 10 to 30 kHz
0 ° 90
1.0
5
0.996
10
0.985
15
0.966
20
0.940
25 0.906
30
0.866
35
0.819
0.00 %
0.02 %
0.05 %
0.07 %
0.10 %
0.12 %
0.15 %
40
0.766
45
0.707
50
0.643
55
0.574
60
0.500
65
0.423
70
0.342
75
0.259
0.18 %
0.22 %
0.26 %
0.31 %
0.37 %
0.45 %
0.56 %
0.72 %
0.98 %
80
0.174
85
0.087
1.49 %
2.99 %
90
0.000 —
0.01 %
0.15 %
0.29 %
0.43 %
0.58 %
0.74 %
0.92 %
1.11 %
1.33 %
1.58 %
1.88 %
2.26 %
2.73 %
3.38 %
4.33 %
5.87 %
8.92 %
17.97 %
—
0.06 %
0.37 %
0.68 %
1.00 %
1.33 %
1.69 %
2.08 %
2.50 %
2.99 %
3.55 %
4.22 %
5.05 %
6.11 %
7.55 %
9.65 %
13.09 %
19.85 %
39.95 %
—
0.55 %
1.46 %
2.39 %
3.35 %
4.35 %
5.42 %
6.58 %
7.87 %
9.32 %
11.00 %
13.01 %
15.48 %
18.65 %
22.96 %
29.27 %
39.56 %
59.83 %
—
—
1.52 %
3.04 %
4.58 %
6.17 %
7.84 %
9.62 %
11.54 %
13.68 %
16.09 %
18.88 %
22.21 %
26.32 %
31.60 %
38.76 %
49.23 %
66.33 %
100.00 %
—
—
3.41 %
5.67 %
7.97 %
10.34 %
12.83 %
15.48 %
18.35 %
21.53 %
25.12 %
29.29 %
34.25 %
40.37 %
48.24 %
58.91 %
74.52 %
100.00 %
—
—
—
To calculate exact ac watts power adders due to phase uncertainty for values not shown, use the subsequent formula:
Adder
=
100 ( 1
−
Cos
(
Φ
Cos
+ ΔΦ
)
( )
)
For example: For a PF of .9205 (
Φ = 23) and a phase uncertainty of
ΔΦ
= 0.15, the ac watts power adder is:
Adder
=
100 ( 1
−
Cos
(23
Cos
+
.
15 )
( )
)
=
0 .
11 %
AC and DC Power Specifications
Power is simulated through the controlled simultaneous outputs of voltage and current from the Calibrator. While the amplitude and frequency ranges of the outputs are broad, there are certain combinations of voltage and current where the specifications are valid. In general these are for all dc voltages and currents, and AC voltages of 30 mV to 1020 V, ac currents from 33 mA to 20.5 A, for frequencies from 10 Hz to 30 kHz. Operation outside of these areas, within the overall calibrator capabilities, is possible, but it is not specified. The table and figure below illustrate the specified areas where power and dual output are possible.
Specification Limits for Power and Dual Output Operation
Frequency Voltages (NORMAL) Currents Voltages (AUX)
Power Factor
(PF)
dc
10 to 45 Hz
45 to 65 Hz
65 to 500 Hz
65 to 500 Hz
500 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
10 to 30 kHz
0 to ±1020 V
33 mV to 32.9999 V
33 mV to 1020 V
330 mV to 1020 V
3.3 to 1020 V
330 mV to 1020 V
3.3 to 500 V
3.3 to 250 V
3.3 V to 250 V
0 to ±20.5 A
3.3 mA to 2.99999 A
3.3 mA to 20.5 A
33 mA to 2.99999 A
33 mA to 20.5 A
33 mA to 20.5 A
33 mA to 2.99999 A
33 to 329.99 mA
33 mA to 329.99 mA
0 to ±7 V
10 mV to 5 V
10 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 5 V
1 to 5 V
1 V to 3.29999 V
Notes
The range of voltages and currents shown in “DC Voltage Specifications,” “DC Current Specifications,” “AC Voltage (Sine Wave)
Specifications,” and “AC Current (Sine Wave) Specifications” are available in the power and dual output modes (except minimum current for ac power is 0.33 mA). Only those limits shown in this table and illustrated in the following figure are specified.
See “Calculate Power Uncertainty” to determine the uncertainty at these points.
The phase adjustment range for dual ac outputs is 0 ° to ±179.99 °. The phase resolution for dual ac outputs is 0.01 °.
⎯
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
1-19
5502A
Service Manual
1020 V
1000
Not Specified
500 V
250 V
100
33 mA - 20.5 A
32.999 V
AC
Voltage
10
3.3 V
1.0
33 mA - 3 A
330 mV
Not Specified
100 mV
10 mV and
Below
10 Hz
33 mV
45 65 100 500 1 K 5 K
Frequency
10 K - 30 K 100 K 500 K
Figure 2. Permissible Combinations of AC Voltage and AC Current for Power and Dual Output
Calculate the Uncertainty Specifications of Power and Dual Output Settings
Overall uncertainty for power output in watts (or VARs) is based on the root sum square (rss) of the individual uncertainties in percent for the selected voltage, current, and, if AC power, the phase parameters:
Watts uncertainty
VARs uncertainty
U
power
=
U
VARs
=
U
2
Voltage
+
U
2
Current
+
U
2
Phase
U
2
Voltage
+
U
2
Current
+
U
2
Phase
Dual Output uncertainty
U
Dual
=
U
2
Voltage
+
U
2
AuxVoltage
+
U
2
Phase
Because there are an infinite number of combinations, you must calculate the actual ac power uncertainty for your selected parameters. The results of this method of calculation are shown in the subsequent example. These examples are at various selected calibrator settings (with 1-year specifications):
1-20
DC Current
1
Examples of Specified Power Uncertainties at Various Output Settings:
Selected Output Settings
Absolute Uncertainty as specified for tcal
±5 °C, ±(% of
output setting)
Power
Absolute
Uncerainty
±(% of
Watts)
[1]
Voltage
Setting
(Volts)
1000.00
1000.00
1000.00
100
100
Current
Setting
(Amps)
+10.000 +0.500.000
15.000 +2.0000
100.000 +20.000
1000.00 20.000
120.000 1.00000
120.000 1.00000
240.000 1.00000
240.000 1.00000
20
20
20
0.30
0.30
Frequency
Hz
Phase
Setting
(units of PF)
DC
DC
DC
DC
60
60
50
50
55
55
55
30000
30000
1
0.766
1
0.766
1
0.766
-0.906
1
0.766
Phase
Setting
(Degrees)
0.0
40.0
0.0
40.0
0.0
40.0
-25.0
0.0
40.0
Selected
Power
(Watts)
5
30
2000
20000
120
91.92
240
183.84
20000
15320
18120
30.0
22.98
U
Voltage
U
Current
0.00550 % 0.04680 %
0.00533 % 0.03220 %
0.00600 % 0.10375 %
0.00565 % 0.10375 %
U
Phase
0.05200 % 0.14500 % 0.220 %
0.05200 % 0.14500 % 0.122 %
0.12900 % 0.4667 % 3.407 %
U
Power
0.047 %
0.033 %
0.104 %
0.104 %
0.05250 % 0.06000 % 0.000 % 0.080 %
0.05250 % 0.06000 % 0.220 % 0.234 %
0.05125 % 0.06000 % 0.000 % 0.079 %
0.05125 % 0.06000 % 0.220 % 0.234 %
0.05200 % 0.14500 % 0.000 % 0.154 %
0.269 %
0.196 %
3.442 %
0.12900 % 0.4667 % 25.128 % 25.133 %
[1] Add 0.02 % unless a settling time of 30 seconds is allowed for output currents >10 A or for currents on the highest two current ranges within 30 seconds of an output current >10 A.
Calculate Power Uncertainty
Overall uncertainty for power output in watts (or VARs) is based on the root sum square (RSS) of the individual uncertainties in percent for the selected voltage, current, and phase parameters:
Watts uncertainty
U
Power
=
U
2
Voltage
+
U
2
Current
+
U
2
Phase
VARs uncertainty
U
VARs
=
U
2
Voltage
+
U
2
Current
+
U
2
Phase
Because there are an infinite number of combinations, you must calculate the actual ac power uncertainty for your selected parameters. The method of calculation is best shown in the subsequent examples (with 1-year specifications):
Example 1 Output: 100 V, 1 A, 60 Hz, Power Factor = 1.0 ( Φ=0).
Voltage Uncertainty Uncertainty for 100 V at 60 Hz is 0.050 % + 3 mV, totaling: 100 V x .0.0005 = 50 mV added to
3 mV = 53 mV. Expressed in percent: 53 mV/100 V x 100 = 0.053 % (see “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications”).
Current Uncertainty Uncertainty for 1 A at 60 Hz is 0.05 % +100
μA, totaling: 1 A x 0.0005 = 500 μA added to
100 μA = 0.6 mA. Expressed in percent: 0. 6 mA/1 A x 100 = 0.06 % (see “AC Current (Sine Waves) Specifications”).
Phase Uncertainty (Watts) Adder for PF = 1 (
Φ=0) at 60 Hz is 0 % (see “Phase Specifications”).
Total Power Uncertainty =
U power
= 0 .
053
2
+ 0 .
06
2
+ 0
2
= 0 .
080 %
Example 2 Output: 100 V, 1 A, 400 Hz, Power Factor = 0.5 (
Φ=60)
Voltage Uncertainty Uncertainty for 100 V at 400 Hz is 0.050% + 3 mV, totaling: 100 V x .0.0005 = 50 mV added to
3 mV = 53 mV. Expressed in percent: 53 mV/100 V x 100 = 0.053 % (see “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications”).
Current Uncertainty Uncertainty for 1 A at 400 Hz is 0.05 % +100
μA, totaling: 1 A x 0.0005 = 500 μA added to
100
μA = 0.6 mA. Expressed in percent: 0. 6 mA/1 A x 100 = 0.06 % (see “AC Current (Sine Waves) Specifications”).
Phase Uncertainty (Watts) Adder for PF = 0.5 ( Φ=60) at 400 Hz is 2.73 % (see “Phase Specifications”).
Total Power Uncertainty = U power
= 0 .
053
2
+ 0 .
06
2
+ 2 .
73
2
= 2 .
73 %
VARs When the Power Factor approaches 0.0, the Watts output uncertainty becomes unrealistic because the dominant characteristic is the VARs (volts-amps-reactive) output. In these cases, calculate the Total VARs Output Uncertainty, as shown in example 3:
Example 3 Output: 100 V, 1 A, 60 Hz, Power Factor = 0.174 ( Φ=80)
Voltage Uncertainty Uncertainty for 100 V at 60 Hz is 0.050% + 3 mV, totaling: 100 V x .0.0005 = 50 mV added to
3 mV = 53 mV. Expressed in percent: 53 mV/100 V x 100 = 0.053 % (see “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications”).
Current Uncertainty Uncertainty for 1 A at 60 Hz is 0.05 % +100
μA, totaling: 1 A x 0.0005 = 500 μA added to
100 μA = 0.6 mA. Expressed in percent: 0. 6 mA/1 A x 100 = 0.06 % (see “AC Current (Sine Waves) Specifications”).
1-21
5502A
Service Manual
Phase Uncertainty (VARs) Adder for
Φ=80 at 60 Hz is 0.05 % (see “Phase Specifications”).
Total VARS Uncertainty =
U
VARs
= 0 .
053
2
+
0 .
06
2 +
0 .
05
2 =
0 .
094 %
Additional Specifications
The subsequent paragraphs provide additional specifications for the 5502A Calibrator ac voltage and ac current functions.
These specifications are valid after allowing a warm-up period of 30 minutes, or twice the time the 5502A has been turned off. All extended range specifications are based on performing the internal zero-cal function at weekly intervals, or when the ambient temperature changes by more than 5 °C.
Frequency
Frequency Range
0.01 to 119.99 Hz
120.0 to 1199.9 Hz
1.2 to 11.999 kHz
12 to 119.99 kHz
120.0 to 1199.9 kHz
1.2 to 2.000 MHz
Resolution
0.01 Hz
0.1 Hz
1 Hz
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±5 °C ±(ppm + mHz)
25 + 1
25 + 1
25 + 1
25 + 15
25 + 15
25 + 15
Jitter
2 μs
2 μs
2
μs
140 ns
140 ns
140 ns
Harmonics (2 nd
to 50 th
)
Fundamental
Frequency
[1]
10 to 45 Hz
45 to 65 Hz
65 to 500 Hz
500 Hz to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
10 to 30 kHz
Voltages NORMAL
Terminals
33 mV to 32.9999 V
33 mV to 1020 V
33 mV to 1020 V
330 mV to 1020 V
3.3 to 1020 V
3.3 to 1020 V
Currents
3.3 mA to 2.99999 A
3.3 mA to 20.5 A
33 mA to 20.5 A
33 mA to 20.5 A
33 to 329.9999 mA
33 to 329.9999 mA
Voltages AUX
Terminals
10 mV to 5 V
10 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 3.29999 V
Amplitude
Uncertainty
Same % of output as the equivalent single output, but twice the floor adder.
[1] The maximum frequency of the harmonic output is 30 kHz (10 kHz for 3.3 to 5 V on the Aux terminals). For example, if the fundamental output is 5 kHz, the maximum selection is the 6th harmonic (30 kHz). All harmonic frequencies (2nd to 50th) are available for fundamental outputs between 10 Hz and 600 Hz (200 Hz for 3.3 to 5 V on the Aux terminals).
Phase Uncertainty ................................................. Phase uncertainty for harmonic outputs is 1 degree or the phase uncertainty shown in “Phase Specifications” for the particular output, whichever is greater. For example, the phase uncertainty of a 400 Hz fundamental output and 10 kHz harmonic output is 10 ° (from “Phase
Specifications”). Another example, the phase uncertainty of a 50 Hz fundamental output and a 400 Hz harmonic output is 1 degree.
Example of determining Amplitude Uncertainty in a Dual Output Harmonic Mode
What are the amplitude uncertainties for the following dual outputs?
NORMAL (Fundamental) Output:
100 V, 100 Hz ................................................. From “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) 90 Day Specifications” the single output specification for 100 V, 100 Hz, is 0.039 % + 3 mV. For the dual output in this example, the specification is 0.039 % + 6 mV as the
0.039 % is the same, and the floor is twice the value (2 x 3 mV).
AUX (50th Harmonic) Output:
100 mV, 5 kHz ................................................ From “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) 90 Day Specifications” the auxiliary output specification for 100 mV, 5 kHz, is 0.15 % + 450
μV. For the dual output in this example, the specification is 0.15 % + 900 μV as the
0.15 % is the same, and the floor is twice the value (2 x 450
μV).
1-22
Additional Specifications
1
AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Extended Bandwidth
tcal
±5 °C
Normal Channel (Single Output Mode)
Max Voltage Resolution
1.0 to 33 mV
34 to 330 mV
0.4 to 33 V
0.01 to 9.99 Hz
±(5.0 % of output
+0.5 % of range)
Two digits, e.g., 25 mV
Three digits
Two digits
0.3 to 3.3 V
10 to 330 mV
0.4 to 5 V
500.1 kHz to 1 MHz
1.001 to 2 MHz
-10 dB at 1 MHz, typical
-31 dB at 2 MHz, typical
Auxiliary Output (Dual Output Mode)
0.01 to 9.99 Hz
±(5.0 % of output
+0.5 % of range)
Two digits
Three digits
Two digits
AC Voltage (Non-Sine Wave)
Triangle Wave &
Truncated Sine
Range, p-p
[1]
2.9 to 92.999 mV
93 to 929.999 mV
0.93 to 9.29999 V
9.3 to 93 V
Frequency
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±5 °C,
±(% of output + % of range)
[2]
Normal Channel (Single Output Mode)
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 20 kHz
20 to 100 kHz
[3]
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 20 kHz
20 to 100 kHz
[3]
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 20 kHz
20 to 100 kHz
[3]
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
0.5 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
0.5 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
0.5 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 20 kHz
20 to 100 kHz
[3]
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
0.5 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
Max Voltage Resolution
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
29 to 929.999 mV
0.93 to 9.29999 V
9.3 to 14.0000 V
Auxiliary Output (Dual Output Mode)
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
[1] To convert p-p to rms for triangle wave, multiply the p-p value by 0.2886751. To convert p-p to rms for truncated sine wave, multiply the p-p value by 0.2165063.
[2] Uncertainty is stated in p-p. Amplitude is verified using an rms-responding DMM.
[3] Uncertainty for Truncated Sine outputs is typical over this frequency band.
1-23
5502A
Service Manual
AC Voltage (Non-Sine Wave) (cont.)
Square Wave
Range (p-p)
[1]
2.9 to 65.999 mV
66 to 659.999 mV
0.66 to 6.59999 V
6.6 to 66.0000 V
29 to 659.999 mV
0.66 to 6.59999 V
6.6 to 14.0000 V
Frequency
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±5 °C, ±(% of output + % of range)
[2]
Normal Channel (Single Output Mode)
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 20 kHz
20 to 100 kHz
0.01 to 10 Hz
0.25 + 0.25
0.5 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
5.0 + 0.5
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 20 kHz
20 to 100 kHz
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
0.5 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
1 to 20 kHz
20 to 100 kHz
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 20 kHz
20 to 100 kHz
0.5 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
0.5 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
[3]
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
[3]
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
[3]
Auxiliary Output (Dual Output Mode)
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
[1] To convert p-p to rms for square wave, multiply the p-p value by 0.5.
[2] Uncertainty is stated in p-p. Amplitude is verified using an rms-responding DMM.
[3] Limited to 1 kHz for Auxiliary outputs ≥6.6 V p-p.
Max Voltage Resolution
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
1-24
Additional Specifications
1
AC Voltage, DC Offset
Range
[1]
(Normal Channel)
3.3 to 32.999 mV
33 to 329.999 mV
0.33 to 3.29999 V
3.3 to 32.9999 V
9.3 to 92.999 mV
93 to 929.999 mV
0.93 to 9.29999 V
9.3 to 93.0000 V
Offset Range
[2]
Max Peak
Signal
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±5 °C
[3]
±(% of dc output + floor)
Sine Waves (rms)
0 to 50 mV 80 mV
0 to 500 mV
0 to 5 V
800 mV
8 V
0 to 50 V 55 V
Triangle Waves and Truncated Sine Waves (p-p)
0 to 50 mV
0 to 500 mV
80 mV
800 mV
0 to 5 V
0 to 50 V
8 V
55 V
Square Waves (p-p)
0.1 + 33
0.1 + 330 μV
0.1 + 3300
μV
0.1 + 33 mV
0.1 + 93
0.1 + 930
μV
μV
0.1 + 9300
μV
μV
0.1 + 93 mV
6.6 to 65.999 mV
66 to 659.999 mV
0.66 to 6.59999 V
6.6 to 66.0000 V
0 to 50 mV
0 to 500 mV
0 to 5 V
0 to 50 V
80 mV
800 mV
8 V
55 V
0.1 + 66 μV
0.1 + 660 μV
0.1 + 6600 μV
0.1 + 66 mV
[1] Offsets are not allowed on ranges above the highest range shown above.
[2] The maximum offset value is determined by the difference between the peak value of the selected voltage output and the allowable maximum peak signal. For example, a 10 V p-p square wave output has a peak value of 5 V, allowing a maximum offset up to ± 50 V to not exceed the 55 V maximum peak signal. The maximum offset values shown above are for the minimum outputs in each range.
[3] For frequencies 0.01 to 10 Hz, and 500 kHz to 2 MHz, the offset uncertainty is 5 % of output, ±1 % of the offset range.
AC Voltage, Square Wave Characteristics
Risetime @
1 kHz
Typical
Settling Time @
1 kHz Typical
Overshoot
@ 1 kHz
Typical
Duty Cycle Range Duty Cycle Uncertainty
<1
μs
<10 μs to 1 % of final value
<2 %
1 % to 99 % <3.3 V p-p.
0,01 Hz to 100 kHz
±(0.02 % of period + 100 ns), 50 % duty cycle
±(0.05 % of period + 100 ns), other duty cycles from 10 % to 90 %
AC Voltage, Triangle Wave Characteristics (typical)
Linearity to 1 kHz
0.3 % of p-p value, from 10 % to 90 % point
Aberrations
<1 % of p-p value, with amplitude >50 % of range
1-25
5502A
Service Manual
AC Current (Non-Sine Wave)
Triangle Wave &
Truncated Sine Wave
Range p-p
Frequency
10 to 45 Hz
0.047 to 0.92999 mA
[1]
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
0.93 to 9.29999 mA
9.3 to 92.9999 mA
[1]
[1]
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
93 to 929.999 mA
[1]
0.93 to 8.49999 A
[2]
1 to 10 kHz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
8.5 to 57 A
[2]
45 to 500 Hz
500 Hz to 1 kHz
[1] Frequency limited to 1 kHz with LCOMP on.
[2] Frequency limited to 440 Hz with LCOMP on.
AC Current (Non-Sine Wave) (cont.)
Square Wave Range p-p Frequency
0.047 to 0.65999 mA
[1]
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.66 to 6.59999 mA
[1]
6.6 to 65.9999 mA
[1]
1 to 10 kHz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
10 to 45 Hz
66 to 659.999 mA
[1]
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
10 to 45 Hz
0.66 to 5.99999 A
[2]
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
6 to 41 A
[2]
45 to 500 Hz
500 Hz to 1 kHz
[1] Frequency limited to 1 kHz with LCOMP on.
[2] Frequency limited to 440 Hz with LCOMP on.
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal
±5 °C
±(% of output + % of range)
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
10 + 2
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
10 + 2
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
10 + 2
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
10 + 2
0.5 + 1.0
0.5 + 0.5
10 + 2
0.5 + 0.5
1.0 + 1.0
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal
±5 °C
±(% of output + % of range)
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
10 + 2
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
10 + 2
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
10 + 2
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
10 + 2
0.5 + 1.0
0.5 + 0.5
10 + 2
0.5 + 0.5
1.0 + 1.0
Max Current
Resolution
Six digits
Six digits
Six digits
Six digits
Six digits
Max Current
Resolution
Six digits
Six digits
Six digits
Six digits
1-26
Additional Specifications
1
AC Current, Square Wave Characteristics (typical)
I <6 A @ 400 Hz
3 A & 20 A Ranges off on
25
μs 40
100
μs 200
Overshoot
<10 % for <1 V Compliance
<10 % for <1 V Compliance
AC Current, Triangle Wave Characteristics (typical)
Linearity to 400 Hz
0.3 % of p-p value, from 10 % to 90 % point
Aberrations
<1 % of p-p value, with amplitude >50 % of range
1-27
5502A
Service Manual
1-28
Chapter 2
Theory of Operation
Introduction
This chapter gives a description of the analog and digital sections of the
Calibrator at a block diagram level. Figure 2-1 shows the configuration of assemblies in the Calibrator.
The Calibrator outputs:
• DC voltage from 0 V to ±1020 V.
• AC voltage from 1 mV to 1020 V, with output from 10 Hz to 500 kHz.
• AC current from 29 μA to 20.5 A, with variable frequency limits.
• DC current from 0 to ±20.5 A.
• Resistance values from a short circuit to 1100 MΩ.
• Capacitance values from 220 pF to 110 mF.
• Simulated output for eight types of Resistance Temperature Detectors
(RTDs).
• Simulated output for eleven types of thermocouples.
2-1
5502A
Service Manual
Main CPU (A9)
Filter (A12)
Voltage (A8)
Current (A7)
DDS (A6)
Synthesized Impedance (A5)
Oscilloscope Calibration Option (A4)
Encoder (A2)
Keyboard (A1)
FRONT
Motherboard (A3) yg116f.eps
Figure 2-1. 5502A Internal Layout
Encoder PCA (A2)
The Encoder PCA (A2) has its own microprocessor and is in communication with the Main CPU PCA (A9) on the Rear Panel through a serial link. Memory for the
Encoder PCA is contained in EPROM. The Encoder PCA is the interface to the
Keyboard PCA (A1)
Synthesized Impedance PCA (A5)
The Synthesized Impedance PCA (A5) supplies variable resistance and capacitance outputs. It uses discrete resistors and capacitors as references, with an amplifier in series. Figure 2-2 is a block diagram of the synthesized resistance function. Figure 2-3 is a block diagram of the synthesized capacitance function.
For resistance synthesis, there is a two-wire compensation circuit, an input amplifier, two DACs (coarse and fine) with offset adjust, and an output LO buffer.
For capacitance synthesis, there is a two-wire compensation circuit, selectable references, an input amplifier, two DACs (coarse and fine), and an output LO buffer.
2-2
Theory of Operation
Synthesized Impedance PCA (A5)
2
NORMAL HI
Rref
_
+
DAC
Rx =
RCOM
NORMAL LO
NORMAL
HI
C x
=
Figure 2-2. Synthesized Resistance Function
K
C ref
DAC
-1
C x
= (1 + K) • C ref
NORMAL
LO yg117f.eps
SCOM
Figure 2-3. Synthesized Capacitance Function
yg118f.eps
2-3
5502A
Service Manual
DDS PCA (A6)
The DDS (Direct Digital Synthesis) PCA (A6) has these functional blocks:
• References for all voltage and current functions
• Gain elements for voltage functions and thermocouple measurement and sources
• ±7 V references
• Thermocouple source and measurement amplifier
• An A/D (Analog-to-Digital) measurement system to monitor all functions
• Zero calibration circuitry
• Precision voltage channel DAC (VDAC)
• Precision current channel DAC (IDAC)
• Dual-channel DDS (Direct Digital Synthesizer)
These functional blocks, when used with the Voltage (A8) and/or Current (A7) assemblies, supply:
• Single or dual channel ac and dc volts, amps, and watts
• Offsettable and nonsinusoidal waveforms
• Thermocouple measurement and sourcing
• Internal calibration and diagnostics
• Digital control of all the analog assemblies
DACS are used to control the level of dc signals and to control the amplitude of ac signals.
The dual-channel DDS (Direct Digital Synthesizer) supplies finely stepped digital sine, triangular, and other waveforms.
2-4
Theory of Operation
Current PCA (A7)
2
Current PCA (A7)
The Current PCA outputs six current ranges (330
μA, 3.3 mA, 33 mA, 330 mA,
3 A, and 20 A) and three voltage ranges (330 mV, 3.3 V, and 5 V) to the AUX outputs. The 20 A outputs are sourced through the 20 A AUX binding posts.
The Current PCA connects to the DDS PCA (A6). The Filter PCA (A12) supplies the high current power supplies.
The Current PCA (A7) has these functional blocks:
• A supply that floats.
• Several stages of transconductance amplifier.
• Shunts that sense current and shunt amplifier. (These are the elements that set accuracy.)
Power for the Current PCA is filtered by the Filter PCA (A12). Its common is isolated from SCOM by a shunt resistor.
Figure 2-4 is a block diagram of the current function. Note that the DDS PCA works together with the Current PCA to supply current outputs.
±
IDAC
DDS PCA (A6)
IDAC Error
Amp
DDS
Ch 1 dc ac
Current PCA (A7)
Current
Amp
Ref
SCOM dc ac
AC
Converter
AUX HI
SCOM
Shunt
Amp
SCOM
Shunt
AUX LO
SCOM
Figure 2-4. Current Function (AUX Out Ranges)
ICOM yg119f.eps
2-5
5502A
Service Manual
Voltage PCA (A8)
The Voltage PCA (A8) supplies dc and ac voltage outputs in the range 3.3 V and above. It also supplies all the inguard supplies referenced to SCOM. See the
“Power Supplies” section.
Figure 2-5 is a block diagram of the voltage function and shows the signal paths for dc and ac voltage outputs. The DAC shown in the figure is VDAC, which resides on the DDS PCA. Note that the voltage amplifier for outputs ≥3.3 V resides on the Voltage PCA, but the amplifier for voltage outputs <3.3 V is on the
DDS PCA.
_
+
Error
Amp
± 1
DDS dc ac
Voltage
Amp
( > 3.3V on A8,
< 3.3V on A6 )
±G
NORMAL
HI
NORMAL
LO
Ref
VDAC dc ac
Sense
Amp
_
+
SCOM
AC
Converter
SCOM yg120f.eps
Figure 2-5. Voltage Function
2-6
Theory of Operation
Main CPU PCA (A9)
2
Main CPU PCA (A9)
The Main CPU PCA (A9) attached to the rear-panel assembly communicates with:
• Inguard CPU on the DDS PCA (A6)
• Display assembly CPU
• Serial and IEEE interfaces
• External amplifier (5725A)
The main CPU memory is Flash ROM. There is a real-time clock with a battery backup.
Each analog assembly has the same bus structure:
• One or more Chip Select lines
• Common data bus that connects to the motherboard, latched in by latches
• A fault line that sets all modules to a safe condition if a malfunction is found
The routing of signals to the front panel jacks are controlled by output relays on the motherboard.
Power Supplies
AC line voltage is applied through a line filter to a power module in the rear panel. The module switches to accomodate four line voltages. The outputs of the power module are attached directly to the primaries of the mains transformer.
The safety ground wire is attached from the power module to the rear panel.
Major internal grounds are SCOM, which is attached to OUTPUT LO and the guard shell, ICOM, which is the internal ground for the current function, and
GCOM, which is the outguard common and is attached to earth ground.
Outguard Supplies
The motherboard supplies the outguard power supplies: +12VG, -12VG, and
+5VG. All the transformer connections for the outguard supplies come through one bundle of wires connected to the motherboard with P1. A row of test points in front of the fan lets you to connect to the raw and regulated supplies. The outguard supplies are used only by the CPU PCA (A9) and Encoder PCA (A2).
Inguard Supplies
The inguard supplies are put on the Voltage PCA (A8). The mains transformer connections (inguard SCOM referenced) are connected to the Motherboard (A3).
Current protection devices for each of the supplies are put on the Motherboard. It is unlikely these devices will blow unless there is a second fault since the regulators will limit current below the device ratings.
Filter capacitors for the high-current supply for the Current PCA (A7) are put on the Filter PCA (A12).
The inguard SCOM referenced supplies are +15 V, -15 V, +5 V, -5 V, and
+5RLH. The +5 V and +5RLH supplies share the same raw supply. The +5RLH supply is used exclusively as a relay driver and is nominally approximately 6.3 V.
Test points for these supplies are put in a row across the top of the Voltage PCA.
The 65 V supplies are rectified and filtered on the motherboard but regulated on the Voltage PCA (A8).
2-7
5502A
Service Manual
2-8
Chapter 3
Calibration and Verification
Introduction
Calibrate the Calibrator at the end of a 90 day or 1 year calibration interval. If you recalibrate on a 90 day interval, use the 90 day specifications, which gives higher performance. Use the verification procedure or a section of the procedure when it becomes necessary to make sure that the Calibrator does operate to its specifications.
Fluke recommends that you send the Calibrator to Fluke Calibration for calibration and verification. The Fluke Calibration Service Center uses a software-controlled verification procedure and supplies a test report that includes traceability to national standards. If you plan to calibrate or do a verification of the
Calibrator at your site, use this chapter as a guide. The procedures in this chapter are manual versions of the software-controlled procedure used at the
Fluke Calibration Service Center.
3-1
5502A
Service Manual
Equipment Necessary for Calibration and Verification
Table 3-1 is a list of necessary equipment to calibrate and do a verification of the performance of the Calibrator. If a specified instrument is not available, you can use an equivalent instrument that has the same or better performance.
Table 3-1. Consolidated List of Required Equipment for Calibration and Verification
Qty Manufacturer Model
1 Fluke
1 Fluke
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Guildline
1 Guildline
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Fluke
Keithley
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Guildline
Guildline
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
5500A/LEADS
8508A
752A
155
742A-1k
742A-100
742A-10
742A-1
9230
9230
742A-1M
742A-10 M
9334/100 M
9334/1G
PN 900394
5790A
A40
Equipment
Test lead set
Reference Multimeter
Purpose
All functions
DC voltage, dc current, resistance, thermocouple measurement and sourcing
Reference Divider 100:1, 10:1 DC voltage
Null Detector DC voltage (calibrate Fluke
752A for dc voltage)
Resistance Standard, 1 k
Ω DC
Resistance Standard, 100
Ω DC
Resistance Standard, 10
Ω DC
Resistance Standard, 1
Ω DC
DC current, verification procedure only
DC current
Resistance Standard, 1 M Ω Resistance
Resistance Standard, 10 M Ω Resistance
Resistance Standard, 100 M
Ω Resistance
Resistance Standard, 1G
Ω Resistance
Type N to dual banana adapter AC voltage
AC Measurement Standard
10 mA, 20 mA, 200 mA, 2 A current shunts
AC voltage, ac current
AC current
3-2
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
Table 3-1. Consolidated List of Required Equipment for Calibration and Verification (cont.)
Qty Manufacturer Model
1
1
Fluke
Fluke
1 various
A40A
792A-7004 resistors
Equipment
20 A current shunt
A40 Current Shunt Adapter
Purpose
AC current
AC current
1 k Ω, 200 Ω AC
1
1
1
1
1
Fluke
1 Fluke
Fluke
ASTM various
Or
Clarke-Hess
Fluke
PM 9540/BAN Cable Set
6304
5700A
56 C various
Calibrator
Mercury thermometer
Capacitance
Capacitance
Precision current source for ac/dc current transfers, and to use in conjunction with an
Fluke 8508A DMM for thermocouple measurement function
Thermocouple measurement
Dewar flask and cap, mineral oil lag bath
Thermocouple measurement
Precision Phase Meter
[1]
Phase 2000
6000
PN 690567 Phase Fluke resistor network used as a shunt, 0.01 Ω, 0.09 Ω, 0.9 Ω values needed
Capacitance
1 Fluke 6680B Frequency
[1] If desired, the test uncertainty ratio (TUR) can be improved by characterizing the phase meter with a primary phase standard like the Clarke-Hess 5500 before use.
Calibration
The standard Calibrator has no internal hardware adjustments. Oscilloscope options have hardware adjustments. See Chapter 6. The Control Display steps you through the calibration procedure. Calibration occurs in these steps:
1. The Calibrator sources output values and you measure the outputs with a traceable measurement instrument of higher accuracy. The Calibrator automatically sets the outputs and instructs you to make external connections to applicable measurement instruments.
2. At each measure and enter step, you can push the OPTIONS, and BACK UP
STEP softkeys to redo a step, or SKIP STEP to skip over a step.
3. You can type in the measured results through the front panel keyboard or remotely with an external terminal or computer.
3-3
5502A
Service Manual
Note
Intermixed with the “output and measure” procedures are internal
5520A calibration procedures where operator input is not necessary.
4. The Calibrator calculates a software correction factor and puts it in volatile memory.
5. When the calibration procedure is complete, you are instructed to put all the correction factors in nonvolatile memory or discard them and start again.
For most calibration procedures, the frequency and phase steps are not necessary. All the calibration steps are available from the front panel interface and the remote interface (IEEE-488 or serial). Frequency and phase calibration are recommended after instrument repair, and are available only through the remote interface (IEEE-488 or serial). See the “Calibration Remote Commands” section to learn more about calibration through the remote interface.
Start Calibration
From the front panel, push the key, followed by the CAL softkey twice, and then the 5502A CAL softkey. The CALIBRATION SWITCH on the rear panel can be in the ENABLE or NORMAL position when you begin calibration. It must be set to ENABLE to store the correction factors into nonvolatile memory.
You start a calibration procedure when you push the 5502A CAL softkey. From this point:
1. The Calibrator automatically sets the outputs and prompts you to make external connections to applicable measurement instruments.
2. The Calibrator then goes into Operate mode, or instructs you to put it into
Operate mode.
3. You are then instructed to type in the value read on the measurement instrument.
Note
At each measure and enter step, to do a step again, push the
OPTIONS, and BACK UP STEP softkey, or skip a step with the
SKIP STEP softkey.
DC Volts Calibration (NORMAL Output)
Table 3-2 is a list of equipment necessary to calibrate the dc volts function. (The equipment is also shown in the consolidated table, Table 3-1).
1 Fluke
1 Fluke
1 Fluke
1 Keithley
Table 3-2. Test Equipment Required for DC Volts Calibration
Qty Manufacturer Model
5500A/LEADS
8508A
752A
155
Equipment
Test lead set
Reference Divider
3-4
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
Step
To calibrate the dc voltage function:
1. On the Fluke 8508A put a 4-wire short (Fluke PN 2540973) across the HI and
LO input and sense terminals.
2. Push DCV, then INPUT, and then ZERO FUNC. Allow the zero function to finish.
3. Make sure that the UUT (Unit Under Test) is in Standby.
4. Start the Calibrator calibration as instructed in the “Start Calibration” section.
5. Do an internal DC Zeros Calibration as instructed.
6. Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-1.
7. Measure and type in the values into the UUT for steps 1 through 6 in Table 3-
3 as instructed. You will disconnect and reconnect the reference multimeter as instructed in these steps.
8. Make sure that the UUT is in Standby.
9. Connect the reference multimeter and Reference Divider to the UUT as shown in Figure 3-1.
10. For voltages 30 V dc and above, see the subsequent section.
Table 3-3. Calibration Steps for DC Volts
Calibrator Output (NORMAL)
3-5
5502A
Service Manual
752A
UUT
5502A CALIBRATOR
Set the 8508A to external guard
8508A
Figure 3-1. DC Volts Calibration Connections up to 30 V
hvw115.eps
3-6
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
DC Volts Calibration (30 V dc and Above)
To calibrate the dc voltage function (30 Vdc and above):
1. Before you use the 752A, do the self-calibration on the 752A with the null detector and a 20 V source. See the 752A documentation.
2. Connect the Calibrator (unit under test), 752A, and 8508A as in Figure 3-2.
Make sure that the ground to guard strap on the 752A is not connected.
3. The 8508A must be used on the 10 Vdc range for all measurements. The
752A mode switch must be set to 10:1 for the 30 V measurement, and to
100:1 for all voltages more than 30 V.
4. Measure and type in the values into the UUT for steps 7 through 9 in Table
3-3 (30 V and above) as prompted.
5. Make sure that the UUT is in Standby and disconnect the test equipment.
752A
UUT
5502A CALIBRATOR
Set the 8508A to external guard
8508A
hvw115.eps
Figure 3-2. DC Volts 30 V and Above Calibration Connections
AC Volts Calibration (NORMAL Output)
Table 3-4 is a list of equipment necessary to calibrate the ac volts function. (The equipment is also shown in the consolidated table, Table 3-1.)
Table 3-4. Test Equipment Necessary for AC Volts Calibration
Qty Manufacturer
1
1
1
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Model
5500A/LEADS
PN 900394
5790A
Eqipment
Test lead set
Type N to dual banana adapter
AC Measurement Standard
3-7
5502A
Service Manual
1
2
7
8
9
10
5
6
3
4
11
To calibrate the ac voltage function:
1. Measure the Calibrator output with Input 1 of a Fluke 5790A AC
Measurement Standard. Use a Type N to dual banana adapter as Figure 3-3 shows.
2. Set the 5502A and 5790A to use an external guard connection.
3. Connect the guard to the output low connection at the normal output low terminal of the 5502A.
4. Type in the measured values into the Calibrator for each step in Table 3-5 as instructed.
Steps
Table 3-5. AC Volts Calibration Steps
5502A Output (NORMAL)
Amplitude Frequency
3.29990 V
0.33000 V
100.00 Hz
100.00 Hz
3.00000 V
3.0 V
30.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
30.0000 V
300.000 V
1000.00 V
1000.00 V
500.0 kHz
9.99 Hz
100.00 Hz
100.00 Hz
500.0 kHz
100.00 Hz
70.00 kHz
100.00 Hz
7.000 kHz
5790A
UUT
5502A CALIBRATOR
Set the 5790A to external guard
Figure 3-3. AC Volts Calibration Connections
hvw116.eps
3-8
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
Thermocouple Function Calibration
Table 3-6 is a list of equipment necessary to calibrate the thermocouple measure and source functions. (The equipment is also shown in the consolidated table,
Table 3-1.)
Table 3-6. Test Equipment Necessary for Thermocouple Function Calibration
Qty Manufacturer Model Equipment
1 Fluke 5520A/LEADS Test lead set (includes Type-J thermocouple, wire, and mini plug)
24-gauge solid copper telephone wire 4 feet various
1 ASTM
1 various various
56C various Dewar flask and cap, mineral oil lag bath
1 Fluke 8508A
To calibrate the thermocouple function:
1. Make sure that the UUT is in standby.
2. With no connections to the UUT terminals, push the GO ON softkey as instructed to start TC calibration. Let the internal calibration steps complete.
3. Connect the 8508A to the TC terminals with solid copper telephone wire and a copper (uncompensated) TC miniplug as shown in Figure 3-4. Attach the wires directly to the Reference Multimeter binding posts. Set the Reference
Multimeter to read dc millivolts.
4. Type the measured value into the UUT for step 1 in Table 3-7 as instructed.
5. Disconnect the test equipment.
6. Connect a Type-J thermocouple to the TC terminals on the UUT. Put the thermocouple and a precision mercury thermometer fully in to a mineral oil lag bath that is
±2 °C of ambient temperature. The test setup is shown in
Figure 3-5.
7. Let the temperature measurement become stable for a minimum of 3 minute, then read the temperature on the mercury thermometer and type it into the
UUT.
Step
1
2
Table 3-7. Thermocouple Measurement Calibration Steps
5502A Output (AUX HI, LO)
300 mV dc (NORMAL)
Enter temperature read from mercury thermometer as prompted
3-9
5502A
Service Manual
UUT
5502A CALIBRATOR
8508A
Attach wires directly to binding posts
Mercury
Thermometer
Figure 3-4. Thermocouple Source Calibration Connections
UUT
5502A
CALIBRATOR
hvw117.eps
GUARD 20A
TC
TRIG
J type
Thermocouple
Dewar Flask and Cap
Mineral Oil
Lag Bath hvw101.eps
Figure 3-5. Thermocouple Measure Calibration Connections
DC Current Calibration
Table 3-8 is a list of equipment necessary to calibrate the dc current function.
(The equipment is also listed in Table 3-1.)
You must use the calibrated dc current function of the Calibrator later to prepare for ac calibration. Because of this, you must save the dc current constants after dc current calibration and exit calibration, then resume calibration. This dc current calibration procedure shows how to save, exit, and resume calibration.
3-10
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
Table 3-8. Test Equipment Necessary for DC Current Calibration
Qty Manufacturer
1 Fluke
1 Fluke
1 Fluke
Model
5500A/LEADS
8508A
742A-1k
1
1
Fluke
Fluke
1 Fluke
1 Guildline
742A-100
742A-10
742A-1
9230
Test lead set
Equipment
Resistance Standard, 1 k Ω
Resistance Standard, 100
Ω
Resistance Standard, 10
Ω
Resistance Standard, 1
Ω
To calibrate the dc current function:
1. On the Fluke 8508A put a 4-wire short (Fluke PN 2540973) across the HI and
LO input and sense terminals.
2. Push DCV, then INPUT, and then ZERO FUNC. Allow the zero function to finish.
3. Make sure that the UUT is in standby.
4. Set the 8508A to measure dc voltage.
5. Connect the 8508A and 742A-1k Resistance Standard to the UUT as shown in Figure 3-6.
6. On the first dc current calibration point in Table 3-9, let the output become stable, record the 8508A voltage measurement, and compute the UUT current output with the certified resistance value of the 742A.
7. Type in the calculated value into the UUT.
8. Continue to the subsequent calibration point, make sure that the UUT is in standby, and disconnect the 742A.
9. Do steps 3 through 6 again with the resistance standard or current shunt specified for each calibration point in Table 3-9.
10. Exit calibration and save the calibration constants that were changed so far with the front panel menus or the CAL_STORE remote command.
3-11
5502A
Service Manual
Step
4
5
2
3
6
3.00000 mA
30.000 mA
300.000 mA
2.00000 A
20A, LO
10.0000 A
Table 3-9. DC Current Calibration Steps
5502A Output (AUX HI, LO) Shunt to Use
Fluke 742A-1k 1 k Ω Resistance Standard
Fluke 742A-100 100 Ω Resistance Standard
Fluke 742A-10 10 Ω Resistance Standard
Fluke 742A-1 1
Ω Resistance Standard
Guildline 9230 0.01
Ω shunt
Guildline 9230 0.01
Ω shunt
5502A
5502A CALIBRATOR
Current shunt
8508A
AUX output terminals are used for steps 1-5. 20A terminal is used for step 6.
Figure 3-6. DC Current Calibration Connections
Set the 8508A to external guard hvw118.eps
3-12
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
AC Current Calibration
Note
DC current must be calibrated before you do the ac current calibration.
The ac current calibration uses a number of current shunts that must be dc characterized before they can be used. You can do the dc characterization with the Calibrator, but you must do the complete Calibrator dc current calibration first. In the dc characterization procedure, data is collected for each of the ac current levels that is necessary for the ac current calibration procedure. For example, if a shunt is used for 0.33 mA ac and 3.3 mA ac calibrations, you must get data at .33 mA dc and 3.3 mA dc.
Follow these steps to characterize the shunt:
Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-7.
UUT
5790A
Metal film resistor in enclosure
5502A CALIBRATOR
HI
HI
Set 5790A to external guard
Figure 3-7. AC Current Calibration with Fluke A40 Shunt Connections
hvw130.eps
For each amplitude shown in Table 3-11, apply the equivalent +(positive) and –
(negative) dc current from the Calibrator.
Calculate the actual dc characterization value with this formula:
((+ value) – (- value))
2
The time between the dc characterization of a current shunt and its use in the calibration procedure must be kept to a minimum. To decrease this time, each shunt is characterized immediately before you use it. As the ac current calibration procedure is done, it must be temporarily aborted each time a new shunt value is necessary. After the shunt is characterized, the calibration procedure is continued at the point immediately before.
3-13
5502A
Service Manual
An example of this procedure:
1. Do the dc current calibration procedure.
2. In Table 3-11, select the first current shunt (A40-10 mA)
3. Do a dc characterization of the shunt at the amplitude specified in the table
(as demonstrated above).
4. Do the ac current calibration procedure again and push the SKIP STEP softkey to go to the step(s) where shunt characterization is necessary.
5. Set the Calibrator to OPERATE and measure the ac voltage across the shunt.
6. Use the data collected in the dc characterization with the ac correction factors supplied for the shunt by the manufacturer to calculate the ac current. Type this value into the calibrator.
7. Continue this procedure until you do all the steps in Table 3-11.
Some of the important remote commands used in this procedure are:
• CAL_START MAIN, AI
• CAL_SKIP
• CAL_ABORT
• CAL_NEXT
• CAL_STORE
Start the ac current calibration procedure.
Skip to the appropriate calibration step.
Used to exit calibration between steps.
Perform the next calibration step.
Store the new calibration constants
Because of the complexity of this procedure, it is recommended that the procedure be automated. See Figure 3-9 for a MET/CAL code fragment that demonstrates an automated calibration procedure.
Table 3-10 is a list of equipment necessary to calibrate the ac current function.
(The equipment is also shown in the Table 3-1.) Refer to Figure 3-8 for the equipment connections.
Table 3-10. Test Equipment Necessary for AC Current Calibration
1
1
1
1
1
Qty Manufacturer
1
1
1
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Model
5500A/LEADS
PN 900394
5790A
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
A40-10 mA
A40-200 mA
A40-2A
A40A-20A
792A-7004
Equipment
Test lead set
Type N to dual banana adapter
AC Measurement Standard
Current Shunt, 10 mA
Current Shunt, 200 mA
Current Shunt, 2 A
Current Shunt, 20 A
A40 Current Shunt Adapter
3-14
Steps
15
16
17
18
11
12
13
14
19
1
2
7
8
9
10
5
6
3
4
20
21
22
23
24
25
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
Table 3-11. AC Current Calibration Steps
5502A Output (AUX HI, LO)
3.29990 mA
0.33000 mA
3.00000 mA
3.00000 mA
0.30000 mA
0.30000 mA
0.30000 mA
30.0000 mA
30.0000 mA
30.0000 mA
300.000 mA
300.000 mA
300.000 mA
2.00000 A
2.00000 A
2.00000 A
2.00000 A
2.00000 A
2.00000 A
10.0000 A
10.0000 A
10.0000 A
10.0000 A
10.0000 A
10.0000 A
100.00 Hz
10.00 kHz
30.00 kHz
100.00 Hz
1000.0 Hz
5000.0 Hz
60.00 Hz
100.00 Hz
440.00 Hz
AUX 20A, LO
100.00 Hz
500.00 Hz
1000.00 Hz
60.00 Hz
100.00 Hz
440.00 Hz
100.00 Hz
100.00 Hz
10.00 kHz
30.000 kHz
100.00 Hz
10.00 kHz
30.00 kHz
100.00 Hz
10.00 kHz
30.00 kHz
Fluke A40 10 mA
Fluke A40 10 mA
Fluke A40 10 mA
Fluke A40 10 mA
Fluke A40 10 mA
Fluke A40 10 mA
Fluke A40 10 mA
Fluke A40 200 mA
Fluke A40 200 mA
Fluke A40 200 mA
Fluke A40 2 A
Fluke A40 2 A
Fluke A40 2 A
Fluke A40 2 A
Fluke A40 2 A
Fluke A40 2 A
Fluke A40 2 A
Fluke A40 2 A
Fluke A40 2 A
Fluke A40A 20 A
Fluke A40A 20 A
Fluke A40A 20 A
Fluke A40A 20 A
Fluke A40A 20 A
Fluke A40A 20 A
3-15
5502A
Service Manual
5790A
5790A
Set the 5790A to external guard
UUT
5502A CALIBRATOR
20V
RMS
MAX
A40A Shunt
Input
Ensure the UUT is connected to the shunt "INPUT"
Figure 3-8. AC Current Calibration with Fluke A40A Shunt Connection
hvw131.eps
3-16
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
Fluke Calibration - Worldwide Support Center MET/CAL Procedure
=============================================================================
INSTRUMENT: Sub Fluke 5502A ACI ADJ
DATE: 22-Sep-98
AUTHOR: Gary Bennett, Metrology Specialist
REVISION: 0.6
ADJUSTMENT THRESHOLD: 70%
NUMBER OF TESTS: 1
NUMBER OF LINES: 487
CONFIGURATION: Fluke 5790A
=============================================================================
STEP FSC RANGE NOMINAL TOLERANCE MOD1 MOD2 3 4 CON
# 10 Sep 98 changed Cal_Info? commands to Out? and checked for 10A -
# needs cal_next to get past display; check for 0 out when ACI is done.
#
1.001 ASK- R Q N U C F W
1.002 HEAD AC CURRENT ADJUSTMENT
# Set M[10] to 3mA initially
1.003 MATH M[10] = 0.003
# Reset UUT - get it out of calibration mode.
1.004 IEEE *CLS;*RST; *OPC?[I]
1.005 IEEE ERR?[I$][GTL]
1.006 MATH MEM1 = FLD(MEM2,1,",")
1.007 JMPT
1.008 IEEE CAL_SW?[I][GTL]
1.009 MEME
1.010 JMPZ 1.012
1.011 JMP 1.015
1.012 HEAD WARNING! CALIBRATION SWITCH IS NOT ENABLED.
1.013 DISP The UUT CALIBRATION switch is in NORMAL.
1.013 DISP
1.013 DISP The switch MUST be in ENABLE to store the
1.013 DISP new calibration constants.
1.013 DISP
1.013 DISP Select ENABLE, then press "Advance" to
1.013 DISP continue with the calibration process.
1.014 JMP 1.008
# Reset 5790A standard.
1.015 ACMS *
1.016 5790 * S
1.017 HEAD DCI References
1.018 PIC 552A410m
1.019 IEEE OUT 3.2999mA, 0HZ; OPER; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.020 IEEE [D30000][GTL]
1.021 ACMS G
1.022 5790 A SH N 2W
Figure 3-9. Sample MET/CAL Program
3-17
5502A
Service Manual
1.023 MATH M[17] = MEM
# Apply nominal -DC Current to A40
1.024 IEEE OUT -3.2999mA, 0HZ; OPER; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.025 IEEE [D5000][GTL]
1.026 ACMS G
1.027 5790 A SH N 2W
1.028 MATH M[17] = (ABS(MEM) + M[17]) / 2
1.029 IEEE OUT .33mA, 0HZ; OPER; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.030 IEEE [D15000][GTL]
1.031 ACMS G
1.032 5790 A SH N 2W
1.033 MATH M[18] = MEM
# Apply nominal -DC Current to A40
1.034 IEEE OUT -.33mA, 0HZ; OPER; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.035 IEEE [D5000][GTL]
1.036 ACMS G
1.037 5790 A SH N 2W
1.038 MATH M[18] = (ABS(MEM) + M[18]) / 2
1.039 IEEE OUT 3mA, 0HZ; OPER; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.040 IEEE [D15000][GTL]
1.041 ACMS G
1.042 5790 A SH N 2W
1.043 MATH M[19] = MEM
# Apply nominal -DC Current to A40
1.044 IEEE OUT -3mA, 0HZ; OPER; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.045 IEEE [D5000][GTL]
1.046 ACMS G
1.047 5790 A SH N 2W
1.048 MATH M[19] = (ABS(MEM) + M[19]) / 2
1.049 IEEE CAL_START MAIN,AI; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.050 IEEE CAL_NEXT; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.051 HEAD Calibrating 3.2999mA @ 100Hz
# cal_next is required for initial start.
# after sending AIG330U if you send cal_next 5520A tries to
# start the cal at that time.
# 3.2999mA @ 100Hz
1.052 IEEE *CLS;OPER; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.053 IEEE [D5000][GTL]
1.054 ACMS G
1.055 5790 A SH N 2W
# Calculate difference between the average value of both polarities of DC
# Current and the applied AC Current.
1.056 MATH M[21] = 0.0032999 - (.0032999 * (1 - (MEM / M[17])))
Figure 3-9. Sample MET/CAL Program (cont.)
3-18
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
# Determine measurement frequency to retrieve correct AC-DC difference value.
1.057 IEEE OUT?[I$][GTL]
1.058 MATH M[2] = FLD(MEM2,5,",")
# Retrieve AC-DC difference from data file named "A40-10mA"
1.059 DOS get_acdc A40-10mA
1.060 JMPT 1.064
1.061 OPBR An error occurred during get_acdc
1.061 OPBR Press YES to try again or NO to terminate.
1.062 JMPT 1.059
1.063 JMP 1.231
# Correct the calculated value of AC Current by adding the AC-DC difference
# of the A40-series shunt used at the frequency under test
1.064 MATH MEM = (M[21] * MEM) + M[21]
# Store corrected value into the UUT
1.065 IEEE CAL_NEXT [MEM]; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.066 IEEE ERR?[I$][GTL]
1.067 MATH MEM1 = FLD(MEM2,1,",")
1.068 JMPT 1.231
# 'Ask' UUT for next value to calibrate
1.069 IEEE CAL_REF?[I][GTL]
Figure 3-9. Sample MET/CAL Program (cont.)
DC Volts Calibration (AUX Output)
To calibrate the auxiliary dc voltage function, use the same procedure used for the normal dc voltage output, but connect to the AUX HI and LO terminals on the
UUT. Table 3-12 is a list of the calibration steps for AUX dc volts.
Step
Table 3-12. AUX DC Volts Calibration Steps
5502A Output (AUX)
AC Volts Calibration (AUX Output)
To calibrate the auxiliary ac voltage function, use the same procedure used for the normal ac voltage output, but connect to the AUX HI and LO terminals on the
UUT. Table 3-13 is a list of the calibration steps for AUX dc volts.
Step
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
Table 3-13. AUX Output AC Volts Calibration Steps
5502A Output (AUX)
Amplitude Frequency
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
5.0000 V
5.0000 V
3.0 V
100 Hz
5 kHz
100 Hz
5 kHz
100 Hz
5 kHz
9.99 Hz
3-19
5502A
Service Manual
Resistance Calibration
Table 3-14 is a list of equipment necessary to calibrate the resistance function.
(The equipment is also shown in the consolidated table, Table 3-1.)
Table 3-14. Test Equipment Necessary for Resistance Calibration
Qty Manufacturer
1 Fluke
1 Fluke
Model
5500A/LEADS
8508A
Equipment
Test lead set
To calibrate the resistance function:
1. On the Fluke 8508A put a 4-wire short (Fluke PN 2540973) across the HI and
LO input and sense terminals.
2. Push Ohms, then INPUT, and then ZERO FUNC. Allow the zero function to finish.
3. Make sure that the UUT (Unit Under Test) is in Standby.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Display to connect the 8508A to the
UUT for 4 wire ohms measurement as shown in Figure 3-10.
5. Push the GO ON softkey and let the internal calibration steps complete.
6. Measure and type the values into the UUT for calibration steps 1 through 8 in
Table 3-15 as instructed.
7. Connect the UUT to the 8508A in a 2-wire ohms configuration as shown in
Figure 3-11.
8. On the 8508A, set the function to OHMS. In the Ohms Config menu, turn on
LoI and turn off Fast and 4w
Ω. Set the applicable resistance range for each step in Table 3-15.
9. Measure and type the values into the UUT for calibration steps 9 through 16 in Table 3-15 as instructed.
10. Make sure that the UUT is in standby and disconnect the equipment.
3-20
Step
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
Table 3-15. Resistance Calibration Steps
5502A Output (4-Wire Ohms, NORMAL and AUX)
2-Wire Ohms, NORMAL
8508A
UUT
5502A CALIBRATOR
Figure 3-10. 4-Wire Resistance Connection
hvw119.eps
3-21
5502A
Service Manual
8508A
UUT
5502A CALIBRATOR
Figure 3-11. 2-Wire Resistance Connection
hvw121.eps
3-22
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
Capacitance Calibration
Table 3-16 is a list of equipment necessary to calibrate the capacitance function.
(The equipment is also shown Table 3-1.)
Table 3-16. Test Equipment Necessary for Capacitance Calibration
Qty Manufacturer Model Equipment
1 Fluke PM 9540/BAN Cable Set
1 Fluke PM 6304C
To calibrate the capacitance function:
LCR Meter
1. Connect the UUT to the LCR meter with the Fluke PM 9540/BAN cables as shown in Figure 3-12. These special cables remove the necessity for a fourwire connection.
Note
Make sure there are no other connections to the Calibrator, especially the SCOPE BNC. More ground connections to the
Calibrator can cause erroneous capacitance outputs.
2. Set the frequency on the LCR meter as shown in Table 3-17.
3. Measure and type the values into the UUT for the calibration steps in
Table 3-17 as instructed. The right column in the table shows the best stimulus frequency for each calibration point.
4. Make sure that the UUT is in Standby and disconnect the LCR meter.
Step
5
6
3
4
7
1
2
Table 3-17. Capacitance Calibration Steps
5502A Output (NORMAL)
Calibrator Output Best Stimulus Frequency
200 pF
0.5000 nF
1 kHz
1 kHz
1.1000 nF
3.5000 nF
11.0000 nF
35.000 nF
110.000 nF
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
3-23
5502A
Service Manual
PM6304C
UUT
5502A CALIBRATOR
PM9540/BAN Cable
CH1
Precision
Phase
Meter
Figure 3-12. Capacitance Calibration Connection
NORMAL
Output
Terminals hvw123.eps
AUX
Output
Terminals
5502A CALIBRATOR
CH2
Figure 3-13. Normal Volts and AUX Volts Phase Verification Connection
hvw102.eps
3-24
Calibration and Verification
Calibration Remote Commands
3
5502A CALIBRATOR
Precision
Phase
Meter
CH2
CH1
0.1 Ohm shunt placed as closely as possible to the AUX terminals of the
5522A
Figure 3-14. Volts and Current Phase Verification Connection
If the Phase Meter
LO terminals are not common use a short between NORMAL
LO and AUX LO on the 5522A hvw133.eps
Calibration Remote Commands
Calibration of the calibrator with remote commands is simple. To access the standard calibration steps, send the command:
CAL_START MAIN
To jump to specified calibration steps, you can append a modifier to this command. Table 3-18 is a list of calibration entry points.
Table 3-18. Calibration Entry Points in Remote
Entry Points for CAL_START MAIN
AC Volts
Thermocouple Measuring
DC Current
AC Current
AUX DC Volts
AUX AC Volts
Resistance
Capacitance
AC Volts
Modifier
AV
TEMPX
ICAL
AI
V2
AVS
R
C
AV
3-25
5502A
Service Manual
To go directly to ac volts calibration, send:
CAL_START MAIN,AV
To go directly to resistance calibration, send:
CAL_START MAIN,R
These calibration commands can be used through the IEEE-488 or serial interface. To use the serial interface without a calibration program:
1. Connect the applicable COM port from a PC to the Serial 1 connector of the
Calibrator, with a Fluke PM8914 cable.
2. In Microsoft Windows, open the Terminal program. Set the communications parameters to the values of the Calibrator.
3. Push . Type the calibration command, for example, CAL_START
MAIN
.
What follows is a list of remote calibration commands for the Calibrator. The common commands in this list do not show the * character that must be the first character of the command. These remote commands duplicate what can be initiated through the front panel of the Calibrator when it is set to local mode.
IEEE-488 (GPIB) and RS-232 Applicability Each command title shown in this section shares the same remote interface applicability, IEEE-488 (general purpose interface bus, or GPIB) and RS-232 remote operations, and command group: Sequential, Overlapped, and Coupled.
IEEE-488 RS-232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled
Sequential Commands Commands executed immediately as they are found in the data stream are called sequential commands. A command that is not overlapped or coupled is sequential.
Overlapped Commands Commands that require additional time to execute are called overlapped commands because they can overlap the next command before execution is done.
Coupled Commands Some commands are coupled commands because they
“couple” in a compound command sequence. You must be careful to make sure that one command does not disable the second command and thereby cause a fault.
CAL_ABORT
Description: Instructs the Calibrator to abort the calibration procedure after the present step
Example: CAL_ABORT
3-26
Calibration and Verification
Calibration Remote Commands
3
CAL_BACKUP
Description: Skip to the subsequent entry point in calibration procedure.
CAL_DATE?
Description: Sends a calibration date related to the stored calibration constants.
The date is sent with the same format as the CLOCK command.
Parameter: Which date: MAIN, ZERO, OHMSZERO, SCOPE
CAL_DAYS?
Description: Sends the number of days and hours since the last calibration constants were stored.
Parameter: Which date: MAIN, ZERO, OHMSZERO, SCOPE
Response: 1. (Integer) Days
2. (Integer) Hours
CAL_FACT
Description: Set the procedure "fault action" flag. Procedures refer to calibration and diagnostic procedures. This command is more useful for diagnostics than calibration.
Parameter: (Character) CONT to continue on faults or ABORT to abort on faults
Example: CAL_FACT ABORT (this is the default)
CAL_FACT?
Description: Get the procedure "fault action" flag.
Response: (Character) CONT or ABORT
Example: ABORT
CAL_FAULT?
Description: Get information about calibration error (if one occurred).
Response: 1. error number (use EXPLAIN? command to interpret)
2. Name of step where error occurred
CAL_INFO?
Description: Sends message or instructions related to the present step.
Response: (String) the message string
3-27
5502A
Service Manual
CAL_NEXT
Description: Continue a calibration procedure if it is stopped for a CAL_NEXT command.
Parameter: (Optional) reference value (used if it's waiting for a reference) If the reference value has no unit, the unit is assumed to be that returned by the CAL_REF? command
Example: CAL_NEXT
CAL_REF?
Description: Sends nominal value possible for reference entry.
Response: 1. The nominal value
2. The accepted or implied unit
3. Example: 3.000000e+00,V
CAL_SKIP
Description: Skip to the subsequent entry point in calibration procedure.
CAL_SECT
Description: Skip to the subsequent section of calibration procedure.
CAL_START
Description: Start a calibration procedure.
Parameter: 1. Procedure name:
MAIN is the procedure for the 5520A minus a scope cal option offsets
ZERO is the internal procedure to correct zero offsets
OHMSZERO is the internal procedure to touch up resistance
SCOPE is the procedure for the 5520A-SC300 scope cal option
SC600 is the procedure for the 5520A-SC600 scope cal option
DIAG is the diagnostic pseudo-cal procedure
NOT aborts a procedure after the step underway
2. (Optional) name of the step at which to start.
If this parameter is not supplied, calibration starts at the start.
3-28
Calibration and Verification
Calibration Remote Commands
3
CAL_STATE?
Description: Sends state of calibration.
Response: RUN - In a calibration step
REF - Stopped for a CAL_NEXT with reference (measurement) value
INS - Instruction available, stopped for a CAL_NEXT
NOT - Not in a calibration procedure (or at end of one)
CAL_STEP?
Description: Sends name of step currently running.
Response: (Char) the step name
Example: IDAC_RATIO (running IDAC ratio calibration)
NOT (not running a calibration procedure now)
CAL_STORE
Description: Store new calibration constants (CAL switch must be ENABLED).
CAL_STORE?
Description: Sends if a cal store is necessary or not.
Response: 1 is yes, 0 if no
CAL_SW?
Description: Sends how the calibration switch is set.
Response: (Integer) 1 for enable, 0 for normal
Example: 1
EOFSTR
Description: Sets the End-Of-File character string used for calibration reports.
The maximum length is two characters. The EOF character is kept in nonvolatile memory.
Parameter: The EOF string (two characters maximum)
EOFSTR?
Description: Sends the End-Of-File character string used for calibration reports.
Parameter: None
Response: (String) The End-Of-File character string
3-29
5502A
Service Manual
PR_RPT
Description: Prints a self-calibration report out of one of the serial ports
Parameter: 1. Type of report to print: STORED, ACTIVE, or CONSTS
2. Format of report: PRINT (designed to be read)
SPREAD (designed to be loaded into a spreadsheet)
3. Calibration interval to be used for instrument specifications in the
report: I90D (90 day specifications) or I1Y (1 year specifications)
4. Serial port out which to print report: HOST or UUT
Example: PR_RPT STORED,PRINT,I90D,HOST
RPT?
Description: Sends a self-calibration report.
Parameter: 1. Type of report to send: STORED, ACTIVE, or CONSTS
2. Format of report: PRINT (designed to be read) spreadsheet)
SPREAD (designed to be loaded into a
3. Calibration interval to be used for instrument specifications in the
report:
I90D (90 day specifications) or I1Y (1 year specifications)
Example: RPT? STORED,PRINT,I90D
RPT_PLEN
Description: Sets the page length used for calibration reports. This parameter is stored in nonvolatile memory.
Parameter: Page length
RPT_PLEN?
Description: Sends the page length used for calibration reports.
Parameter: None
Response: (Integer) Page length
RPT_STR
Description: Sets the user report string used for calibration reports. The string is stored in nonvolatile memory. The CALIBRATION switch must be set to ENABLE.
Parameter: String of a maximum of 40 characters
3-30
Calibration and Verification
Calibration Remote Commands
3
RPT_STR?
Description: Sends the user report string used for calibration reports.
Parameter: None
Response: (String) A maximum of 40 characters
STOP_PR
Description: Stops a calibration report print job if one was queued to print.
Parameter: None
UNCERT?
Description: Sends specified uncertainties for the present output. If there is no specification for an output, the uncertainty sent is zero.
Parameter: 1. (Optional) The preferred unit in which to express the primary output uncertainty (default is PCT).
2. (Optional) The preferred unit in which to express the secondary output
uncertainty (default is same as primary unit).
Response: 1. (Float) 90 day specified uncertainty of primary output.
2. (Float) 1 year specified uncertainty of primary output.
3. (Character) unit of primary output uncertainty.
4. (Float) 90 day specified uncertainty of secondary output.
5. (Float) 1 year specified uncertainty of secondary output.
6. (Character) unit of secondary output uncertainty.
Example: With a power output of 1V, 1A, 1kHz:
UNCERT?
Sends 2.00E-02,2.10E-02,PCT,4.60E-02,6.00E-02,PCT
3-31
5502A
Service Manual
Range
329.9999 mV
329.9999 mV
329.9999 mV
3.299999 V
3.299999 V
3.299999 V
3.299999 V
3.299999 V
32.99999 V
32.99999 V
32.99999 V
32.99999 V
32.99999 V
329.9999 V
329.9999 V
329.9999 V
329.9999 V
1000.000 V
1000.000 V
How to Make a Calibration Report
Three different calibration reports are available from the Calibrator, each one formatted to print, or in comma-separated variable format for importation into a spreadsheet. Use the REPORT SETUP softkey below UTILITY FUNCTS / CAL to select lines per page, calibration interval, type of report, format, and which serial port to use. The specification shown in these reports is contingent on the interval set in the REPORT SETUP menu.
The three report types are:
• “stored,” lists output shifts as a result of the most recent stored calibration constants.
• “active,” lists output shifts as a result of a calibration just performed but whose calibration constants are not yet stored.
• “consts,” which is a listing of the active set of raw calibration constant values.
Performance Verifcation Tests
To make sure that the Product is in specification, use Tables 3-19 through 3-31.
The tables are for approved metrology personnel who have access to a standards laboratory that has the correct equipment to test calibration equipment of this level of accuracy. The tables show the recommended test points and the permitted maximum and lower limits for each point. The limits were calculated by adding or subtracting the 90-day specification from the output value. There is no built-in factor for measurement uncertainty.
Table 3-19. Verification Tests for DC Voltage (Normal)
Output
0.0000 mV
329.0000 mV
-329.0000 mV
0.000000 V
1.000000 V
-1.000000 V
3.290000 V
-3.290000 V
0.00000 V
10.00000 V
-10.00000 V
32.90000 V
-32.90000 V
50.0000 V
329.0000 V
-50.0000 V
-329.0000 V
334.000 V
900.000 V
Lower Limit
-0.0030 mV
328.9805 mV
-329.0194 mV
-0.000005 V
0.9999855 V
-1.000045 V
3.2899863 V
-3.290136 V
-0.00005 V
9.99955 V
-10.00045 V
32.89863 V
32.90136 V
49.9972 V
328.9846 V
-50.0027 V
-329.0153 V
333.983 V
899.958 V
Upper Limit
0.0030 mV
329.0194 mV
-328.9805 mV
0.000005 V
1.000045 V
-0.999955 V
3.290136 V
-3.2898638 V
0.00005 V
10.00045 V
-9.99955 V
-32.90136 V
-32.89863 V
50.0027 V
329.0153 V
-49.9972 V
-328.9846 V
334.016 V
900.042 V
3-32
1000.000 V
1000.000 V
1000.000 V
1000.000 V
1020.000 V
-334.000 V
-900.000 V
-1020.000 V
1019.952 V
-900.042 V
-1020.047 V
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verifcation Tests
3
1020.047 V
-899.958 V
-1019.952 V
3-33
5502A
Service Manual
Range
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
7.0000 V
7.0000 V
Table 3-20. Verification Tests for DC Voltage (AUX)
Output
0.000 mV
329.000 mV
-329.000 mV
0.33000 V
3.29000 V
-3.29000 V
7.0000 V
-7.0000 V
Lower Limit
-0.350 mV
328.551 mV
-329.449 mV
0.32955 V
3.28866 V
-3.29134 V
6.9976 V
-7.0025 V
Upper Limit
0.350 mV
329.449 mV
-328.551 mV
0.33045 V
3.29134 V
-3.28866 V
7.0025 V
-6.9976 V
Table 3-21. Verification Tests for DC Current (AUX)
Range Output Lower Limit Upper Limit
329.999 μA 0.000
329.999 μA 190.000
329.999 μA -190.000
329.999 μA 329.000
329.999
μA -329.000 μA -328.941
3.29999 mA 0.00000 mA -0.00005 mA 0.00005 mA
3.29999 mA
3.29999 mA
1.90000 mA
-1.90000 mA
1.89976 mA
-1.90020 mA
1.90024 mA
-1.89980 mA
3.29999 mA
3.29999 mA
32.9999 mA
32.9999 mA
3.29000 mA
-3.29000 mA
0.0000 mA
19.0000 mA
3.28969 mA
-3.29031 mA
-0.00025 mA
18.9982 mA
3.29031 mA
-3.28969 mA
0.00025 mA
19.0018 mA
32.9999 mA
32.9999 mA
32.9999 mA
329.999 mA
329.999 mA
329.999 mA
329.999 mA
329.999 mA
2.99999 A
-19.0000 mA
32.9000 mA
-32.9000 mA
0.000 mA
190.000 mA
-190.000 mA
329.000 mA
-329.000 mA
0.00000 A
-19.0018 mA
32.8971 mA
-32.9029 mA
-0.0033 mA
189.982 mA
-190.018 mA
328.971 mA
-329.029 mA
-0.00004 A
-18.9982 mA
32.9029 mA
-32.8971 mA
0.0033 mA
190.018 mA
-189.982 mA
329.029 mA
-328.971 mA
0.00004 A
3-34
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verifcation Tests
3
Range
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
Table 3-21. Verification Tests for DC Current (AUX) (cont.)
Output
1.09000 A
-1.09000 A
2.99000 A
-2.99000 A
0.0000 A
11.0000 A
-11.0000 A
20.0000 A
-20.0000 A
Lower Limit
1.08979 A
-1.09021 A
2.98906 A
-2.99094 A
-0.0005 A
10.9953 A
-11.0046 A
19.9833 A
-20.0168 A
Upper Limit
1.09021 A
-1.08962 A
2.99094 A
-2.98906 A
0.0005 A
11.0046 A
10.9953 A
20.0168 A
-19.9833 A
Table 3-22. Verification Tests for Resistance
Range Output Lower Limit Upper Limit
10.999 Ω 0.000
10.999 Ω 2.000
10.999 Ω 10.900
32.999
Ω 11.900
32.999
Ω 19.000
32.999
Ω 30.000
109.999
Ω 33.000
109.999 Ω 109.000
329.999 Ω 119.000
329.999 Ω 190.000
329.999 Ω 300.000
1.09999 k
Ω 0.33000 k
Ω 0.330251
1.09999 k
Ω 1.09000 k
Ω 1.090078
3.29999 k
Ω 1.19000 k
Ω 1.190103
3.29999 k
Ω 1.9000 k
Ω 1.900153
3.29999 k Ω 3.00000 k Ω 3.000230
10.9999 k Ω 3.3000 k Ω 3.30025
10.9999 k Ω 10.9000 k Ω 10.90078
32.9999 k Ω 11.9000 k Ω 11.90103
32.9999 k
Ω 19.0000 k
Ω 19.00153
32.9999 k
Ω 30.0000 k
Ω 30.00230
3-35
5502A
Service Manual
Table 3-22. Verification Tests for Resistance (cont.)
Range Output Lower Limit Upper Limit
109.999 k Ω 33.000 k Ω 33.0028
109.999 k Ω 109.000 k Ω 109.0089
329.999 k Ω 119.000 k Ω 119.0127
329.999 k
Ω 190.000 k
Ω 190.0191
329.999 k
Ω 300.000 k
Ω 300.0290
1.09999 M
Ω 0.33000
M
Ω 0.330038
1.09999 M
Ω 1.09000
M
Ω 1.090121
3.29999 M
Ω 1.19000
M
Ω 1.190160
3.29999 M Ω 1.90000 M Ω 1.900239
3.29999 M Ω 3.00000 M Ω 3.000360
10.9999 M Ω 3.3000 M Ω 3.30153
10.9999 M
Ω 10.9000
M
Ω 10.90495
32.9999 M
Ω 11.9000
M
Ω 11.91142
32.9999 M
Ω 19.0000
M
Ω 19.01675
32.9999 M
Ω 30.0000
M
Ω 30.02500
109.999 M
Ω 33.000
M
Ω 33.1350
109.999 M Ω 109.000 M Ω 109.4390
329.999 M Ω 119.000 M Ω 119.5760
329.999 M Ω 290.000 M Ω 291.2600
1100.00 M
Ω 400.00
M
Ω 405.300
1100.00 M
Ω 640.00
M
Ω 648.180
1100.00 M
Ω 1090.00
M
Ω 1103.580
Range
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
Table 3-23. Verification Tests for AC Voltage (Normal)
Output
3.000 mV
3.000 mV
30.000 mV
30.000 mV
30.000 mV
30.000 mV
30.000 mV
30.000 mV
Frequency
45 Hz
10 kHz
9.5 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
20 kHz
Lower Limit
2.977 mV
2.977 mV
28.350 mV
29.944 mV
29.956 mV
29.956 mV
29.956 mV
29.944 mV
Upper Limit
3.022 mV
3.022 mV
31.650 mV,
30.056 mV
30.044 mV
30.044 mV
30.044 mV
30.056 mV
3-36
Range
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verifcation Tests
3
Output
30.000 mV
30.000 mV
30.000 mV
33.000 mV
33.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
0.33000 V
0.33000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.29000 V
3.3000 V
3.3000 V
30.0000 V
30.0000 V
30.0000 V
30.0000 V
30.0000 V
Frequency
50 kHz
100 kHz
450 kHz
50 kHz
100 kHz
500 kHz
45 Hz
10 kHz
9.5 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
45 Hz
10 kHz
9.5 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
20 kHz
10 kHz
9.5 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
1 kHz
10 kHz
20 kHz
50 kHz
100 kHz
450 kHz
1 MHz
45 Hz
Table 3-23. Verification Tests for AC Voltage (Normal) (cont.)
Lower Limit
29.932 mV
29.877 mV
29.715 mV
32,970 mV
32.970 mV
283.350 mV
299.917 mV
299.893 mV
299.983 mV
299.983 mV
299.782 mV
299.702 mV
299.311 mV
298.470 mV
0.32984 V
0.32984 V
2.83500 V
2.99868 V
2.99910 V
2.99910V
2.99910 V
2.99817 V
2.99745 V
2.99437 V
2.98659 V
3.2985 V
3.2985 V
28.3500 V
29.9866 V
29.9919 V
29.9919 V
29.9919 V
Upper Limit
30.068 mV
30.123 mV
30.285 mV
33.029 mV
33.029 mV
316.650 mV
300.083 mV
300.107 mV
300.107 mV
300.107 mV
300.218 mV
300.298 mV
300.689 mV
301.530 mV
0.33015 V
0.33015V
3.16500 V
3.00132 V
3.00090 V
3.00090 V
3.00090 V
3.00183 V
3.00255 V
3.00563V
3.01340 V
2.250 V
[1]
3.3014 V
3.3014 V
31.6500 V
30.0134V
30.0081 V
30.0081 V
30.0081 V
3-37
5502A
Service Manual
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
Range
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
Output
30.0000 V
30.0000 V
30.0000 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
33.000 V
33.000 V
300.000 V
300.000 V
300.000 V
300.000 V
300.000 V
200.000 V
1020.00 V
1020.00 V
1020.00 V
1020.00 V
330.00 V
330.00 V
1000.00V
1000.00 V
1020.00 V
1020.00 V
1000.00 V
1000.00 V
1020.00 V 1020.00 V
1020.00 V 1020.00 V
[1] Typical specification is -24 dB at 2 MHz
Table 3-23. Verification Tests for AC Voltage (Normal) (cont.)
Frequency
20 kHz
50 kHz
90 kHz
45 Hz
10 kHz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
8 kHz
1 kHz
8 kHz
45 Hz
10 kHz
45 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
18 kHz
50 kHz
100 kHz
Lower Limit
29.9802 V
29.9736 V
29.9404 V
32.984 V
32.969 V
299.880 V
299.880 V
299.799 V
299.754 V
299.703 V
199.536 V
329.84 V
329.73 V
999.56 V
999.56 V
999.349 V
999.23 V
1019.55 V
1019.21 V
Upper Limit
30.0198 V
30.0264 V
30.0596 V
33.015 V
33.030V
300.120 V
300.120 V
300.201 V
300.246 V
300.297 V
200.464 V
330.15 V
330.26 V
1000.44 V
1000.44 V
1000.66 V
1000.77 V
1020.44 V
1020.78 V
10.000 mV
10.000 mV
10.000 mV
10.000 mV
10.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
Table 3-24. Verification Tests for AC Voltage (AUX)
Frequency
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
9.5 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
Lower Limit
9.622 mV
9.622 mV
9.535 mV
9.520 mV
8.700 mV
283.500 mV
299.180 mV
299.390 mV
299.390 mV
299.100 mV
298.650 mV
Upper Limit
10.378 mV
10.378 mV
10.465 mV
10.480 mV
11.300 mV
316.500 mV
300.820 mV
300.610 mV
300.610 mV
300.900 mV
301.350 mV
3-38
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verifcation Tests
3
329.999 mV
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
300.000 mV
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V 5.00000 V
[1] Set the NORMAL output to 300 mV.
Table 3-24. Verification Tests for AC Voltage (AUX) (cont.)
Frequency
30 kHz
9.5 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
9.5 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
Lower Limit
287.100 mV
2.835 V
2.99505 V
2.99745 V
2.99745 V
2.99410 V
2.98960 V
2,87720 V
4.72500 V
4.99205 V
4.99605 V
4.99605 V
4.99110 V
4.98360 V
Upper Limit
312.900 mV
3.165V
3.00495 V
3.00255 V
3.00255 V
3.00590 V
3.01040 V
3.12280 V
5.27500 V
5.00795 V
5.00395 V
5.00395 V
5.00890 V
5.01640 V
Table 3-25. Verification Tests for AC Current
Range Output Frequency Lower Limit Upper Limit
329.99
μA 33.00 kHz 32.87
μA
329.99 μA 33.00
329.99 μA 33.00
329.99 μA 190.00 Hz
329.99
μA 190.00 kHz
329.99
μA 190.00 kHz 188.66
μA
329.99
μA 190.00 kHz 187.32
μA
329.99
μA 329.00
Hz
329.99
μA 329.00
Hz
329.99 μA 329.00 kHz
329.99 μA 329.00 kHz
329.99 μA 329.00 kHz 326.83 μA
329.99
μA 329.00 kHz 324.65
μA
3.2999 mA 0.3300 mA 1 kHz 0.3296 mA 0.3304 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
0.3300 mA
0.3300 mA
5 kHz
30 kHz
0.3293 mA
0.3268 mA
0.3307 mA
0.3332 mA
3-39
5502A
Service Manual
Range
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
32.999 mA
32.999 mA
32.999 mA
32.999 mA
32.999 mA
32.999 mA
32.999 mA
32.999 mA
32.999 mA
32.999 mA
32.999 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
2.99999 A
Table 3-25. Verification Tests for AC Current (cont.)
Output
1.9000 mA
1.9000 mA
1.9000 mA
3.2900 mA
3.2900 mA
3.2900 mA
3.2900 mA
3.2900 mA
3.2900 mA
3.3000 mA
3.3000 mA
3.3000 mA
19.0000 mA
19.0000 mA
19.0000 mA
32.9000 mA
32.9000 mA
32.9000 mA
32.9000 mA
32.9000 mA
33.0000 mA
33.0000 mA
33.0000 mA
190.0000 mA
190.0000 mA
190.0000 mA
329.0000 mA
329.0000 mA
329.0000 mA
329.0000 mA
329.0000 mA
329.0000 mA
0.33000 A
Frequency
1 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
30 kHz
1 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
10 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
1 kHz
5 kHz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
1 kHz
30 kHz
1 kHz
5 kHz
30 kHz
1 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
10 Hz
Lower Limit
1.8983 mA
1.8921 mA
1.8842 mA
3.2846 mA
3.2872 mA
3.2872 mA
3.2845 mA
3.2765 mA
3.2631 mA
3.297 mA
3.296 mA
3.285 mA
18.991 mA
18.967 mA
18.935 mA
32.849 mA
32.886 mA
32.877 mA
32.844 mA
32.791 mA
32.97 mA
32.92 mA
32.69 mA
189.91 mA
189.60 mA
189.19 mA
328.49 mA
328.86 mA
328.86 mA
328.69 mA
328.37 mA
327.75 mA
0.32978 A
Upper Limit
1.9017 mA
1.9079 mA
1.9158 mA
3.2954 mA
3.2928 mA
3.2928 mA
3.2955 mA
3.3035 mA
3.3169 mA
3.303 mA
3.304 mA
3.315 mA
19.009 mA
19.033 mA
19.065 mA
32.951 mA
32.914 mA
32.923 mA
32.956 mA
33.009 mA
33.03 mA
33.08 mA
33.31 mA
190.09 mA
190.40 mA
190.81 mA
329.51 mA
329.14 mA
329.14 mA
329.31 mA
329.63 mA
330.25 mA
0.33022 A
3-40
Range
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
0.3999 nF
0.3999 nF
1.0999 nF
1.0999 nF
1.0999 nF
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verifcation Tests
3
Table 3-25. Verification Tests for AC Current (cont.)
Output
0.33000 A
0.33000 A
1.09000 A
1.09000 A
1.09000 A
1.09000 A
1.09000 A
2.99000 A
2.99000 A
2.99000 A
2.99000 A
2.99000 A
3.3000 A
3.3000 A
3.3000 A
11.0000 A
11.0000 A
11.0000 A
11.0000 A
11.0000 A
20.0000 A
20.0000 A
20.0000 A
20.0000 A
20.0000 A
Frequency
5 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
500 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
45 Hz
65 Hz
500 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
45 Hz
65 Hz
500 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
Lower Limit
0.32735 A
0.31840 A
1.08827 A
1.08951 A
1.08951 A
1.08355 A
1.06320 A
2.98542 A
2.98840 A
2.98840 A
2.97405 A
2.92520 A
3.2954 A
3.2954 A
3.2155 A
10.9840A
10.9840 A
10.9807 A
10.9807 A
10.7200 A
19.9750 A
19.9750 A
19.9690 A
19.9690 A
19.4950 A
Table 3-26. Verification Tests for Capacitance
0.2200 nF
0.3500 nF
0.4800 nF
0.6000 nF
1.0000 nF
5 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
Lower Limit
0.2192 nF
0.3387 nF
0.4682 nF
0.5877 nF
0.9862 nF
Upper Limit
0.33265 A
0.34160 A
1.09174 A
1.09049 A
1.09049 A
1.09645 A
1.11680A
2.99459 A
2.99160 A
2.99160 A
3.00595 A
3.05480 A
3.3046 A
3.3046 A
3.3845 A
11.0160 A
11.0160A
11.0193 A
11.0193 A
11.2800A
20.0250 A
20.0250 A
20.0310 A
20.0310 A
20.5050 A
Upper Limit
0.2308 nF
0.3613 nF
0.4918 nF
0.6123 nF
1.0138 nF
3-41
5502A
Service Manual
Table 3-26. Verification Tests for Capacitance (cont.)
Lower Limit Upper Limit
3.299 nF
10.999 nF
10.999 nF
2.0000 nF
7.0000 nF
10.9000 nF
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1.9824 nF
6.9767 nF
10.8693 nF
2.0176 nF
7.0233 nF
10.9307 nF
32.999 nF
109.99 nF
109.99 nF
329.99 nF
20.000 nF
70.00 nF
109.00 nF
200.00 nF
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
19.8620 nF
69.767 nF
108.693 nF
199.320 nF
20.1380 nF
70.233 nF
109.307 nF
200.680 nF
329.99 nF 300.00 nF 1 kHz 299.130 nF 300.870 nF
1.0999 μF 0.7000 Hz 0.69767 μF
1.0999 μF 1.0900 Hz 1.05929 μF
3.2999 μF 2.0000 Hz 1.99320 μF
3.2999
μF 3.0000
Hz 2.99130
μF
10.999
μF 7.000
10.999
μF 10.900
Hz 10.8693
μF
32.999
μF 20.000
Hz 19.9100
μF
32.999
μF 30.000
Hz 29.8800
μF
109.99 μF 70.00 Hz 69.662 μF
109.99 μF 109.00 Hz
329.99 μF 200.00 μA dc 199.020 μF 200.980
298.680
μF 301.320
329.99
μF 300.00 μA dc
1.0999 mF
1.0999 mF
0.3300 mF
0.7000 mF
90
μA dc
180
μA dc
0.32788 mF
0.69662 mF
0.33212 mF
0.70338 mF
1.0999 mF
3.299 mF
1.0900 mF
1.100 mF
270
μA dc
270
μA dc
1.08529 mF
1.0933 mF
1.09471 mF
1.1067 mF
3.299 mF 2.000 mF 1.9902 mF 2.0098 mF
3.299 mF
10.999 mF
10.999 mF
3.000 mF
3.300 mF
10.900 mF
540 μA dc
800 μA dc
900 μA dc
2.7 mA dc
2.9868 mF
3.2788 mF
10.8529 mF
3.0132 mF
3.3212 mF
10.9471 mF
32.999 mF
32.999 mF
110.00 mF
110.00 mF
20.000 mF
30.000 mF
33.00 mF
110.00 mF
5.4 mA dc
8.0 mA dc
9.0 mA dc
27.0 mA dc
19.8300 mF
29.7600 mF
32.570 mF
108.800 mF
20.1700 mF
30.2400 mF
33.430 mF
111.200 mF
3-42
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verifcation Tests
3
TC Type
10
μV/°C
TC Type
10 μV/°C
Table 3-27. Verification Tests for Thermocouple Simulation
Output,
°C
Lower Limit, mV
0.00 °C (0.0000 mV)
100.00 °C (1.0000 mV)
-100.00 °C (-1.0000 mV)
1000.00
°C (10.0000 mV)
-0.0030
0.99696
-1.00304
9.99660
-1000.00
°C (10.0000 mV)
-10.0034
10000.00
°C (100.0000 mV)
99.9930
-10000.00
°C (-100.0000 mV) -100.0070
Upper Limit, mV
0.0030
1.00304
-0.99696
10.00340
-9.9966
100.0070
-99.9930
Table 3-28. Verification Tests for Thermocouple Measurement
Input, mV Lower Limit,
°C
0.00
°C (0,0000 mV)
-0.30 -0.30
10000.00 °C (100.0000 mV) 9999.30
-10000.00 °C (-100.0000 mV) -10000.70
30000.00 °C (300.0000 mV) 29998.50
-30000.00 °C (-300.0000 mV) -30001.50
10000.70
-9999.30
30001.50
-29998.50
3-43
5502A
Service Manual
Range,
Normal
Output, V
Table 3-29. Verification Tests for Phase Accuracy, V and V
Output,
Normal V
Frequency
65 Hz
400 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
65 Hz
400 Hz
1 kHz
3.29999 3.00000
5 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
65 Hz
400 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
Range,
AUX
Output
3.29999 V
Output,
AUX
3.00000 V
Phase
0
60
90
°
Lower
Limit
°
Upper
Limit
°
-0.150 0.150
-0.900 0.900
-2.000 2.000
-6.000
-10.000
6.000
10.000
-15.000 15.000
59.850 60.150
59.100
58.000
54.000
50.000
60.900
62.000
66.000
70.000
45.000 75.000
89.850 90.150
89.100
88.000
90.900
92.000
84.000
80.000
96.000
100.000
75.000 105.000
89.85 90.15
89.85 90.15
3-44
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verifcation Tests
3
Range,
Normal
Output, V
32.999 mV
329.999 V
Output,
Normal V
3.3000 V
33.000 V
Frequency
30.000 mV
65 Hz
1 kHz
30 kHz
329.999 mV
200.000 mV 65 Hz
65 Hz
50.000 mV
400 Hz
30.000 mV 65 Hz
65 Hz
200.000 mV 65 Hz
400 Hz
65 Hz
65 Hz
65 Hz
400 Hz
65 Hz
65 Hz
65 Hz
400 Hz
65 Hz
65 Hz
400 Hz
65 Hz
65 Hz
65 Hz
400 Hz
65 Hz
Table 3-30. Verification Tests for Phase Accuracy, V and I
Range,
AUX
Output
Output,
AUX
329.99 mA 300.00 mA
329.99 mA 300.00 mA
329.99 mA 300.00 mA
2099999 A 2.00000 A
20.5000 A 5.0000 A
20.5000 A 5.0000 A
329.99 mA 300.00 mA
2.99999 A 2.00000 A
20.5000 A 20.0000 A
20.5000 A 20.0000 A
329.99 mA 300.00 mA
2.99999 A 2.00000 A
20.5000 A 5.0000 A
20.5000 A 5.0000 A
329.99 mA 300.00 mA
2.99999 A 2.00000 A
20.5000 A 20.0000 A
20.5000 A 20.0000 A
329.99 mA 300.00 mA
2.99999 A 2.00000 A
20.5000 A 5.0000 A
20.5000 A 5.0000 A
329.99 mA 300.00 mA
2.99999 A 2.00000 A
20.5000 A 20.0000 A
20.5000 A 20.0000 A
Phase
°
0
60
0
90
0
90
Lower
Limit
°
Upper
Limit
°
-0.15 0.15
-2.00 2.00
-15.00 15.00
-0.15
-0.15
0.15
0.15
-0.90 0.90
59.85 60.15
59.85
59.85
60.15
60.15
59.10 60.90
-0.15 0.15
-0.15
-0.15
0.15
0.15
-0.90 0.90
89.85 90.15
89.85
89.85
90.15
90.15
89.10 90.90
-0.15 0.15
-0.15
-0.15
0.15
0.15
-0.90 0.90
89.85 90.15
89.85
89.85
89.10
90.15
90.15
90.90
3-45
5502A
Service Manual
Range, Normal
Output, V
Table 3-31. Verification Tests for Frequency
Output, Normal,
V
120.0 Hz
1000.0 Hz
100.00 kHz
119.99600 Hz
999.974000 Hz
99.99750000 Hz
119.00398 Hz
120.00400 Hz
1000.026000 Hz
100.00250000 Hz
[1] Frequency accuracy is specified for 1 year.
3-46
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Introduction
The Calibrator is a high performance instrument and it is not recommended that the user repair the boards to the component level. It is easy to introduce a subtle long-term stability problem when you touch the boards. Access procedures are supplied for those who must replace a defective module.
Basic Maintenance
This section tells you how to do the usual maintenance and calibration tasks necessary to keep the 5502A Calibrator in service.
Warning
To prevent possible electrical shock, fire, or personal injury:
• Turn off the Product and remove the mains power cord.
Stop for 2 minutes to let the internal circuits discharge before you open the fuse door or remove Product covers.
• Replace a blown fuse with exact replacement only for
continued protection against arc flash.
• Disconnect the mains power cord before you remove the
Product covers.
• Use only specified replacement parts.
• Use only specified replacement fuses.
• Have an approved technician repair the Product.
4-1
5502A
Service Manual
Replace the Mains Fuse
Access the mains power fuse from the rear panel. The fuse rating information above the ac power input module shows the correct replacement fuse for each line voltage setting. Table 4-1 shows the fuse part numbers for each line voltage setting.
To verify or replace the fuse, refer to Figure 4-1 and do the subsequent steps:
1. Disconnect mains power.
Warning
To prevent possible electrical shock, fire, or personal injury, turn off the Product and remove the mains power cord. Stop for
2 minutes to let the internal circuits discharge before you open the fuse door or remove Product covers.
2. The mains power fuse and mains voltage switch are in a compartment on the right end of the ac input module. To open the compartment and remove the fuse, put the blade of a standard screwdriver to the left of the tab at the left side of the compartment cover.
3. Pull the tab out of the slot and the compartment cover will come part way out.
4. Remove the compartment cover.
5. The fuse comes out with the compartment cover and can be easily replaced.
To install the fuse, push the compartment cover back into the compartment until the tab locks with the ac input module.
Table 4-1. Replacement Line Fuses
Part Number
109215
851931
Fuse Description
5A/250 V Time Delay
2.5A/250 V Time Delay
To ensure safety, use exact replacement only.
Line Voltage Setting
100 V or 120 V
220 V or 240 V
4-2
Maintenance
Replace the Mains Fuse
4
MAINS SUPPLY
100V/120
V
220V/240
V
FUSE
T5.0A 250
T2.5A 250
V (SB)
V (SB)
CAUTIO
N
FOR FIRE PROTECTIO
V FUSE OF I
600VA MAX
NG
CHASSIS
GROU
ND
WARNING:
WARNING:
TO AVOID PHYSICAL I
NSTALLED BEFORE E
NJURY, I
TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK GROU
N POWER CORD MUST BE CO
NERGIZI
NSURE THA
NG INSTRU
Line Voltage
Indicator
0V
(SB)
Changing Line Fuse
Changing Line
Voltage
120
240
120
gjh004.eps
Figure 4-1. Accessing the Fuse
4-3
5502A
Service Manual
Replace the Current Fuses
Warning
To prevent possible electrical shock, fire, or personal injury:
• Disconnect the mains power cord before you remove the
bottom fuse cover.
• Use only specified replacement fuses.
Access the current fuses from the bottom of the Calibrator. These fuses are the
3A and 20A outputs protection from over-current. Table 4-2 shows the fuse part numbers for the two current fuses. To replace a current fuse:
1. Turn the Calibrator over on its top.
2. Remove the two screws with a Phillips head screwdriver as shown in Figure
4-2.
4 A/500 V
Ultra Fast
(3 A Output)
25 A/250 V
Fast
(20 A Output)
Figure 4-2. Current Fuse Replacement
3. Lift off the fuse door.
4. Remove the fuse and replace it with a new fuse of the same rating.
Table 4-2. Replacement Current Fuses
Part Number
3674001
3470596
To ensure safety, use exact replacement only.
Fuse Description
4A/500 V Ultra Fast
25A/250 V Fast
5. Replace the fuse door over the fuse compartment.
6. Install the two screws to hold the fuse door in position. gjh068.eps
4-4
Maintenance
Clean the Air Filter
4
Clean the Air Filter
The air filter must be removed and cleaned every 30 days or more frequently if the calibrator is operated in a dusty environment. The air filter is accessed from the rear panel of the calibrator.
To clean the air filter, refer to Figure 4-3 and continue as follows:
1. Turn off the power, let the fan stop, and disconnect the ac mains cord.
2. Remove the filter element.
3. Hold the top and bottom of the air filter frame.
4. Squeeze the edges of the frame to the middle to disengage the filter tabs from the slots in the calibrator.
5. Pull the filter frame straight out from the calibrator.
6. Clean the filter element.
7. Clean the filter element in soapy water.
8. Flush the filter element.
9. Shake out the unwanted water, and then let the filter element to dry before you install it.
10. Install the filter element. Do the filter removal steps in reverse.
CHASSIS
GROU
W
CO
AR
N
D
NN
N
IN
G
GROU
N
N
DI
N
G CO
TO CLEA
A
N
D FLUSH
N
FILTER REMO
NN
ECTOR I
W
ITH SOAPY
N
N
PO
W
E FROM I
W
ATER
N
T
Figure 4-3. Access the Air Filter
oq062f.eps
4-5
5502A
Service Manual
Clean the Calibrator
Clean the case, front panel keys, and display with a soft cloth dampened with water or a non-abrasive weak cleaning solution that will not harm plastics.
Caution
Do not use aromatic hydrocarbons or chlorinated solvents for cleaning. They can damage the plastic materials used in the calibrator.
PCA Access Procedure
Use the procedures in this section to remove:
• Main Central Processing Unit (CPU) (A9)
• Rear Panel Module (transformer and ac line input components)
• Filter PCA (A12)
• Encoder (A2) and display assemblies
• Keyboard PCA, and thermocouple I/O pca
Remove Analog Modules
To remove the Voltage (A8), Current (A7), DDS (A6), or Synthesized Impedance
(A5) modules:
1. Remove eight Phillips screws from the top cover.
2. Remove the top cover.
3. Remove eight Phillips screws form the guard box cover. The locations of the analog modules are printed on the guard box cover.
4. Lift off the guard box cover with the finger pull on the rear edge of the cover.
5. Release the board edge locks on the analog module to be removed.
6. Lift the board out of its socket in the Motherboard. Put the board shield side down.
7. To remove the shield, remove Phillips screw at the center of the shield, then pull the sides of the shield away from the board.
8. To install the shield, first align one set of tabs then push the other side into position.
4-6
Maintenance
PCA Access Procedure
4
Main CPU (A9)
You can remove the Main CPU (A9) with the rear panel and Filter PCA (A12) installed. To remove the Main CPU PCA:
1. Remove the 3/16 inch jack screws from the SERIAL 1, SERIAL 2, and
BOOST AMPLIFIER connectors.
2. Remove the ¼ inch jack screws from the IEEE-488 connector.
3. Remove three Phillips screws from the right side of the rear panel.
4. Remove the ribbon cable from the Main CPU PCA (A9). There is not much room, but the cable is reachable.
5. Lift out the Main CPU PCA (A90).
Rear-Panel Assemblies
To remove the transformer and the ac line input filter:
Note
Figure 4-4 shows an exploded view of the rear-panel assemblies.
1. Remove six Allen screws from the rear handles and then remove the handles.
2. Remove eight Phillips screws from the bottom cover.
3. Remove the bottom cover.
4. Remove the three Phillips screws that you access through holes in the bottom flange.
5. Remove the power switch pushrod.
6. Remove the rear panel. If the Main CPU (A9) is removed, then there are three large cables, plus one for fan power. If the Main CPU is installed, there is one more cable.
Filter PCA (A12)
To remove the Filter PCA (A12):
1. Remove the top cover and guard-box cover. See the instructions in the
“Remove Analog Modules” section.
2. Remove all the analog modules.
3. Remove the five Phillips screws from the front side of the rear guard box wall.
4. Lift out the Filter PCA.
Encoder (A2) PCA and Display Assembly
To remove the Encoder PCA (A2) PCA and Display assembly:
Note
Figure 4-5 shows an exploded view of the front-panel assemblies.
1. Remove top and bottom covers.
2. With the bottom side up, disconnect all the cables that go to the front panel.
One of these cables is attached by a cable tie that must be cut, then replaced with a new one when you assemble the Calibrator.
3. Remove six Allen screws from the two front handles. Then remove the handles.
4-7
5502A
Service Manual
4. Remove the front panel. The Encoder PCA (A2) and display pcas are now accessible.
Keyboard (A1) and Access the Output Block
To remove the keyboard and access the output block:
1. Do all four steps in the “Encoder and Display” section.
2. Unlatch the plastic catches that fasten the front panel together.
3. Remove four Phillips screws that are around the output block.
4. Remove the output cables.
5. Pull apart the two main parts of the front panel.
4-8
Maintenance
PCA Access Procedure
4
Figure 4-4. Exploded View of Rear-Panel Assemblies
om016f.eps
4-9
5502A
Service Manual
4-10
Figure 4-5. Exploded View of Front-Panel Assemblies
hvw017f.eps
Maintenance
Diagnostic Tests
4
Diagnostic Tests
The Calibrator software has extensive self-test procedures. If self-test finds a malfunction, then use diagnostic tests to start fault isolation.
Note
Only do self-tests after the Calibrator has completed its warm-up.
To access the diagnostic menus:
1. Push .
2. Push the UTILITY FUNCTNS softkey.
3. Push the SELF TEST softkey.
The menu shows:
• DIAG – Starts internal diagnostics
• FRONT PANEL – Lets you start the test for front panel knob, keys, bell, and displays.
• SERIAL IF TEST – Does a loopback test between the two serial ports. For this test, you must attach a straight-through serial cable between the two serial ports. Pins 2, 3, and 5 must be connected for this test.
• DIGITAL TEST – Does a test on the RAM and the bus on the Main CPU
(A9).
How to Do Diagnostic Tests
To do diagnostic tests:
1. Push .
2. Push the UTILITY FUNCTNS softkey.
3. Push the SELF TEST softkey. The menu shows OPTIONS and GO ON.
4. Push the GO ON softkey to start diagnostics.
The Calibrator instructs you to remove all cables from the front-panel outputs.
Install a low-ohm copper short circuit across the 20A and AUX LO terminals.
After you push the GO ON softkey, an automatic sequence of tests start.
Diagnostics has a set of steps that are almost the same as the zero calibration and reports errors.
How to Test the Front Panel
To test the front panel:
1. Push .
2. Push the UTILITY FUNCTNS softkey.
3. Push the SELF TEST softkey.
4. Push the DIAG softkey.
The menu shows:
KNOB TEST – Does a test on the knob encoder that shows a cursor that moves when you turn the knob.
KEY TEST – A test that shows the name of the key in the display when you push a key. Push to exit the test.
4-11
5502A
Service Manual
BELL TEST – Lets you operate the beeper for different periods of time.
DISPLAY – Turns on segments of the two displays. Push to exit the test.
With Main software version 3.6, you can also push , , or to exit the test.
Note
When you do a test on the output display (DISPLAY MEAS), you can select one of three test patterns: ALLON, ALLOFF, and
CURSOR TEST.
Complete List of Error Messages
Table 4-3 is a list of Calibrator error messages.
Table 4-3. Error Message Format
Error Number (Message Class : Description) Text Characters
0 to 65536 QYE Query Error, caused by a full input buffer, unterminated action or interrupted action
F Error is shown on the front panel as it occurs.
DDE Device-Specific Error, caused by some condition in the 5520A, for example, overrange
R Error is queued to the remote interface as it occurs
EXE Execution Error, caused by an element external to, or inconsistent with, the 5502A
CME Command Error, caused by incorrect command syntax, unrecognized header, or parameter of the incorrect type
S Error causes instrument to go to Standby
D Error causes instrument to go to the power up state
Up to 36 text characters
(none) Error is sent to to the initiator only (i.e., local initiator or remote initiator)
0
1
(QYE: ) No Error
(DDE:FR ) Error queue overflow
100 (DDE:FR D) Inguard not responding (send)
101 (DDE:FR D) Inguard not responding (recv)
102 (DDE:FR D) Lost sync with inguard
103 (DDE:FR ) Invalid guard xing command
104 (DDE:FR D) Hardware relay trip occurred
105 (DDE:FR D) Inguard got impatient
106 (DDE:FR D) A/D fell asleep
107 (DDE:FR D) Inguard watchdog timeout
108 (DDE:FR ) Inguard is obsolete
109 (DDE:FR D) Inguard parity error
4-12
110 (DDE:FR D) Inguard overrun error
111 (DDE:FR D) Inguard framing error
112 (DDE:FR D) Inguard fault error
113 (DDE:FR D) Inguard fault input error
114 (DDE:FR D) Inguard fault detect error
115 (DDE:FR D) Inguard read/write error
300 (DDE: )
301 (DDE: )
Invalid procedure number
No such step in procedure
302 (DDE: )
303 (DDE: )
304 (DDE: )
305 (DDE: )
Can't change that while busy
Can't begin/resume cal there
Wrong unit for reference
Entered value out of bounds
306 (DDE: )
307 (DDE: )
Not waiting for a reference
Continue command ignored
308 (DDE:FR ) Cal constant outside limits
309 (DDE:FR ) Cal try to null failed
310 (DDE:FR D) Sequence failed during cal
311 (DDE:FR D) A/D measurement failed
312 (DDE:FR ) Invalid cal step parameter
313 (DDE: ) Cal switch must be ENABLED
314 (DDE:FR ) Divide by zero encountered
315 (DDE:FR ) Must be in OPER at this step
316 (DDE:FR ) Open thermocouple for RJ cal
317 (DDE:FR ) Bad reference Z or entry
318 (DDE:FR ) Cal takes DAC over top limit
319 (DDE: R ) Zero cal needed every 7 days
320 (DDE: R ) Ohms zero needed every 12 hours
398 (QYE:F ) Unusual cal fault %d
399 (QYE:F ) Fault during %s
400 (DDE:FR D) Encoder not responding VERS
401 (DDE:FR D) Encoder not responding COMM
402 (DDE:FR D) Encoder not responding STAT
403 (DDE:FR ) Encoder self-test failed
405 (DDE:FR ) Message over display R side
406 (DDE:FR ) Unmappable character #%d
407 (DDE:FR ) Encoder did not reset
408 (DDE:FR ) Encoder got invalid command
409 (DDE:FR D) Encoder unexpectedly reset
500 (DDE: ) Internal state error
501 (DDE: )
502 (DDE: )
Invalid keyword or choice
Harmonic must be 1 - 50
503 (DDE: )
504 (DDE: )
505 (DDE: )
506 (DDE: )
507 (DDE: )
508 (DDE: )
509 (DDE: )
510 (DDE: )
511 (DDE: )
512 (DDE: )
513 (DDE: )
Frequency must be >= 0
AC magnitude must be > 0
Impedance must be >= 0
Function not available
Value not available
Cannot enter watts by itself
Output exceeds user limits
Duty cycle must be 1.0-99.0
Power factor must be 0.0-1.0
Can't select that field now
Edit digit out of range
Maintenance
Complete List of Error Messages
4
4-13
5502A
Service Manual
4-14
514 (DDE: )
515 (DDE: )
516 (DDE: )
517 (DDE: )
518 (DDE: )
519 (DDE: )
520 (DDE: )
521 (DDE: )
522 (DDE: )
523 (DDE: )
526 (DDE: )
527 (DDE: )
528 (DDE: )
529 (DDE: )
530 (DDE: )
531 (DDE: )
Can't switch edit field now
Not editing output now dBm only for single sine ACV
Freq too high for non-sine
Value outside locked range
Must specify an output unit
Can't do two freqs at once
Can't source 3 values at once
Temp must be degrees C or F
Can't do that now
Limit too small or large
No changes except RESET now
Offset out of range
Cannot edit to or from 0 Hz
Bad state image - not loaded
TC offset limited to +/-500 C
532 (DDE: )
533 (DDE: )
534 (DDE: )
535 (DDE: )
Can't go to STBY in Meas TC
Can't set an offset now
Can't lock this range
Can't set phase or PF now
536 (DDE: )
537 (DDE: )
Can't set wave now
Can't set harmonic now
538 (DDE: ) Can't change duty cycle now
539 (DDE: ) Can't change compensation now
540 (DDE:FR ) Current OUTPUT moved to 5725A
541 (DDE: )
542 (DDE: )
TC ref must be valid TC temp
Can't turn EARTH on now
543 (DDE: D) STA couldn't update OTD
544 (DDE: ) Can't enter W with non-sine
545 (DDE: )
546 (DDE: )
Can't edit now
Can't set trigger to that now
547 (DDE: ) Can't set output imp. now
548 (DDE:FR ) Compensation is now OFF
549 (DDE: )
550 (DDE: )
551 (DDE: )
552 (DDE: )
553 (DDE: )
554 (DDE: )
555 (DDE: )
556 (DDE: )
Period must be >= 0
A report is already printing
ScopeCal option not installed
Not a ScopeCal function
Can't set marker shape now
Can't set video parameter now
Marker location out of range
Pulse width must be 1 - 255
557 (DDE: )
558 (DDE: )
559 (DDE: )
560 (DDE: )
Can't set range directly now
Not a range for this function
Can't set TD pulse now
ZERO_MEAS only for C or PRES meas
561 (DDE:FR ) That requires a -SC option
562 (DDE:FR ) That requires a -SC600 option
563 (DDE: )
564 (DDE: )
Time limit must be 1s-60s
Can't set ref. phase now
565 (DDE: )
566 (DDE: )
567 (DDE: )
ZERO_MEAS reading not valid
Can't set dampen now
Can't turn EXGRD on now
600 (DDE:FR D) Outguard watchdog timeout
601 (DDE:FR ) Power-up RAM test failed
602 (DDE:FR ) Power-up GPIB test failed
700 (DDE: R ) Saving to NV memory failed
701 (DDE: R ) NV memory invalid
702 (DDE: R ) NV invalid so default loaded
703 (DDE: R ) NV obsolete so default loaded
800 (DDE:FR ) Serial parity error %s
801 (DDE:FR ) Serial framing error %s
802 (DDE:FR ) Serial overrun error %s
803 (DDE:FR ) Serial characters dropped %s
900 (DDE:FR ) Report timeout - aborted
1000 (DDE:FR ) Sequence failed during diag
1200 (DDE:FR ) Sequence name too long
1201 (DDE:FR ) Sequence RAM table full
1202 (DDE:FR ) Sequence name table full
1300 (CME: R ) Bad syntax
1301 (CME: R ) Unknown command
1302 (CME: R ) Bad parameter count
1303 (CME: R ) Bad keyword
1304 (CME: R ) Bad parameter type
1305 (CME: R ) Bad parameter unit
1306 (EXE: R ) Bad parameter value
1307 (QYE: R ) 488.2 I/O deadlock
1308 (QYE: R ) 488.2 interrupted query
1309 (QYE: R ) 488.2 unterminated command
1310 (QYE: R ) 488.2 query after indefinite response
1311 (DDE: R ) Invalid from GPIB interface
1312 (DDE: R ) Invalid from serial interface
1313 (DDE: R ) Service only
1314 (EXE: R ) Parameter too long
1315 (CME: R ) Invalid device trigger
1316 (EXE: R ) Device trigger recursion
1317 (CME: R ) Serial buffer full
1318 (EXE: R ) Bad number
1319 (EXE: R ) Service command failed
1320 (CME: R ) Bad binary number
1321 (CME: R ) Bad binary block
1322 (CME: R ) Bad character
1323 (CME: R ) Bad decimal number
1324 (CME: R ) Exponent magnitude too large
1325 (CME: R ) Bad hexadecimal block
1326 (CME: R ) Bad hexadecimal number
1328 (CME: R ) Bad octal number
1329 (CME: R ) Too many characters
1330 (CME: R ) Bad string
1331 (DDE: R ) OPER not allowed while error pending
1332 (CME:FR ) Can't change UUT settings now
1500 (DDE:FRS ) Compliance voltage exceeded
1501 (DDE:FRS ) Shunt amp over or underload
1502 (DDE:FRS ) Current Amp Thermal Limit Exceeded
1503 (DDE:FRS ) Output current lim exceeded
Maintenance
Complete List of Error Messages
4
4-15
5502A
Service Manual
1504 (DDE:FRS ) Input V or A limit exceeded
1505 (DDE:FRS ) VDAC counts out of range
1506 (DDE:FRS ) IDAC counts out of range
1507 (DDE:FRS ) AC scale dac counts out of range
1508 (DDE:FRS ) DC scale dac counts out of range
1509 (DDE:FRS ) Frequency dac counts out of range
1510 (DDE:FRS ) IDAC counts (DC OFFSET) out of range
1511 (DDE:FRS ) ZDAC counts out of range
1512 (DDE:FRS ) Can't read External Clock register
1513 (DDE:FRS ) External Clock too Fast
1514 (DDE:FRS ) External Clock too Slow
1515 (DDE:FR D) Can't load waveform for scope mode
1600 (DDE:FR D) OPM transition error
1601 (DDE:FR D) TC measurement fault
1602 (DDE:FR D) Z measurement fault
65535 (DDE:FR ) Unknown error %d
4-16
Chapter 5
List of Replaceable Parts
Introduction
This chapter contains an illustrated list of replaceable parts for the Calibrator.
Parts are shown by assembly, alphabetized by reference designator. Each assembly is accompanied by an illustration that shows the location of each part and its reference designator.
The parts lists contain:
• Reference designator (for example, “R52”)
• An indication if the part is subject to damage by static discharge (* near the part description)
• Description
• Fluke part number
• Special notes (factory-selected part for example)
Caution
A * symbol shows a device that may be damaged by static discharge.
How to Obtain Parts
Electronic components may be ordered directly from the Fluke Corporation and its authorized representatives with the Fluke part number. Parts price information is available from the Fluke Corporation or its representatives. Refer to Tables 5-1 through 5-5.
To contact Fluke Calibration, call one of the following telephone numbers:
• Technical Support USA: 1-877-355-3225
• Calibration/Repair USA: 1-877-355-3225
• Canada: 1-800-36-FLUKE (1-800-363-5853)
• China: +86-400-810-3435
• Brazil: +55-11-3759-7600
5-1
5502A
Service Manual
• Anywhere in the world: +1-425-446-6110
To see product information or download manuals and the latest manual supplements, visit Fluke Calibration’s website at www.flukecal.com
.
• To register your product, visit http://flukecal.com/register-product .
In the event the part ordered has been replaced by a new or improved part, the replacement will be accompanied by an explanatory note and installation instructions, if necessary.
To make sure you get prompt delivery of the correct part, include in your order:
• Instrument model and serial number
• Part number and revision level of the pca (printed circuit assembly) that contains the part.
• Fluke part number
• Description (as given under the Description heading)
• Quantity
5-2
List of Replaceable Parts
How to Obtain Parts
5
Table 5-1. Front-Panel Assembly
Description
Fluke Part
Number
Quantity
Reference
Designator
A10
A11
H15-H18
TC BUTTON PCA
TC CONNECTION PCA
SCREW,8-32,.375,LO CAP,SCKT,STAINLESS STEEL,BLK
OXIDE,LOCK
4104614
625951
1
1
295105 4
494641 9
STEEL,ZINC-CHROMATE,HI-LO THD FORM
H71-H76 SCREW,PH,P,LOCK,SS,6-32,.500
H38-H41 WASHER, LOW THERMAL #8
H42-H45
H1-H14
NUT, LOW THERMAL, 8-32
SCREW,6-32,.250,PAN,PHILLIPS,STEEL,ZINC-
CLEAR,LOCK
320051 6
859939
850334
3
4
152140 20
H29, H60-H61 BINDING POST-RED
H46-H49 SCREW,6-32,.625,PAN,PHILLIPS,STEEL,ZINC-
CLEAR,LOCK
886832 3
152181 4
J1 CONNECTOR,ADAPTER,C0AXIAL,N(F),SMA(F),BULKHEA
D MOUNT,BULK
1279066 1
J2 CONNECTOR, 1
MP1
MP66
FRONT PANEL, MODIFIED
BEZEL, FRONT PANEL
1593149 1
3468705 2
3843715 1
MP13
MP14
LCD MODULE,5500A,16X2 CHARACTER, STN,
GRAY,TRANSFLECTIVE,YEL-GRN
LCD MODULE,5500A,40X2 CHARACTER,STN,
GRAY,TRANSFLECTIVE,YEL-GRN
929179 1
929182 1
MP8
MP18
MP22
DECAL, OUTPUT BLOCK
DECAL, POWER ON/OFF
KNOB, ENCODER, GREY
4125112
886312
1
1
868794
643814
1
2
5-3
5502A
Service Manual
Table 5-1. Front-Panel Assembly (cont.)
Reference
Designator
Description
MP40-MP41 CLIP,FLAT CABLE FERRITE CORE
Fluke
Part
Number
Quantity
643822
627072
2
2
627064 1
MP36 GROMMET,SLOT,RUBBER,.406,.062
MP38-MP39 FOAM PAD,URETHANE,.312 W,.625 L,.375 THK,ADHESIVE
MP47
MP35
TIE
945258 1
501593 1
107687
3841106
2
1
CABLE ACCESS,TIE,11.00L,.19W,3.00 DIA
CABLE TIE ANCHOR,ADHSV,.160TIE
501734
407908
CABLE ACCESSORY ,CABLE ACCESS,TIE, 4.00L, .10W,.75 DIA 172080
1
1
3
4130421 1
5-4
List of Replaceable Parts
How to Obtain Parts
5
Figure 5-1. Front-Panel Assembly
hvw200.eps
5-5
5502A
Service Manual
5-6
Figure 5-1. Front-Panel Assembly (cont.)
gjh201.eps
List of Replaceable Parts
How to Obtain Parts
5
Table 5-2. Rear-Panel Assembly
Reference
Designator
A9
Description
OUT-GUARD,CPU, PCA SERVICE, 5502A
H155 WASHER,FLAT,.219 ID,.506 OD,.061 THK,STEEL, ZINC-
CHROMATE
H90 H93
H9-H12
CONN ACC,COAX,BNC,NUT
SCREW,8-32,.375,LO CAP,SCKT,STAINLESS STEEL,BLK
OXIDE,LOCK
H91 H94 CONN ACC,COAX,BNC,LOCKWASHER
H3-H5 SCREW,6-32,.250,PAN, PHILLIPS, STEEL, ZINC-CLEAR,LOCK
H6-H8 WASHER,FLAT,STL,.160,.281,.010
H63-H66 WASHER,FLAT,STL,.170,.375,.031
H18-H21 SCREW,CAP,SCKT,STL,LOCK,6-32,.750
Fluke
Part
Number
4238703
Quantity
1
2565513 2
660933 4
622719 2
295105 4
3468705 2
622743 2
152140 3
110288 4
944772 4
944350 4
3834626 1
647138 1
937107 1
625720 1
MP2 TRANSFORMER COVER, PAINTED
MP6 HOUSING, AIR FILTER
T1 TRANSFORMER,POWER,100-240V,50/60HZ,
7:1:2:1:8:2:1:2,5520A-6501,284W,EI175
MP10 SHIM,TRANSFORMER
H2 NUT,HEX,BR,1/4-28
H92 WASHER,LOCK,INTRNL,STL,.267ID
KIT SHEET METAL KIT - 5522A
F1 FUSE,.25X1.25,5A,250V,SLOW
F1 FUSE,.25X1.25,2.5A,250V,SLOW
FL10 FILTER,LINE,PART,FUSE DRWR W/SHRT BAR
H40-H41 SCREW,FHU,P,SS,6-32,.312
E2
E1
MP19
BINDING POST, STUD, PLATED
BINDING HEAD, PLATED
LABEL,CALIB, CERTIFICATION SEAL
L,W/FLAT WASHER
H49-H50 WASHER,FLAT,STL,.191,.289,.010
LOCK,M3.5,6-32,STEEL, ZINC-BLACK OR -CLEAR
LABEL,SERVICE ONLY LABEL- 5080A
H928 WASHER,FLAT,SS,.174,.375,.030
MP67
W1001
WIRE, 6 INCHES GROUND
TRANSFORMER GROUND CABLE
3834644 1
944277 1
867234 2
102707
102889
1
1
802306 1
1777348 2
111047 2
854737 2
3779509 1
626116
2095956
1
1
195263 2
5-7
5502A
Service Manual
5-8
Figure 5-2. Rear-Panel Assembly
gjh202.eps
A6
A7
A8
A12
Kit
Table 5-3. Chassis Assembly
Reference
Designator
A3
Description
PCA, MOTHER BOARD, A3
PCA, DDS, A6
PCA, CURRENT, A07
SUB-ASSY, VOLTAGE, A08
PCA, POWER SUPPLY, A12
SHEET METAL KIT - 5522A
List of Replaceable Parts
How to Obtain Parts
Fluke
Part
Number
3402295
Quantity
1
3440294
1670021
626710
3440413
3834644
1
1
1
1
1
5
MP8-MP9 INSERT, PLASTIC SIDE
937271 2
937276 2
MP24 5700A-2046 ,POWER BUTTON, ON/OFF
878983 2
775338 1
MP25 6070A-2063 ,AIDE,PCB PULL 541730 1
MP29-MP32 GRND STRIP,CU FINGERS,.32,12.50 601770
601762 4 MP33-MP36 GROUND STRIP,BECU FINGERS,ADHES,.32 W,12.5 L
H921-H924
SCREW, M3X0.5,8MM,PAN,PHILLIP,STEEL,ZN-
CHROMATE,ROHS COMPL.
TAPE ,TAPE,FOAM,POLYUR,W/LINER,.3125,.250 MP88
MP952-
MP953
RETAINER, ANALOG TOPCOVER
2803610 4
603134
3472691
1
2
H1-H12
SCREW,8-32,.375,LO CAP,SCKT,STAINLESS STEEL,BLK
OXIDE,LOCK
SCREW ,SCREW,FHU,P,SS,6-32,.312
295105 12
H40-H41 867234 2
H58-H69 SCREW,PH,P,LOCK,SS,6-32,.500
H70-H77
H82-89
320051 12
SCREW,6-32,.250,PAN,PHILLIPS,STEEL,ZINC-CLEAR,LOCK 152140 12
H78-H81
MP1998
SCREW,6-32 X 0.25,FLAT HD UNDERCUT, PHILLIPS, HEAT
TREATED,MAGNETIC SS,NYLON PATCH
EJECTOR, PCB CARD EJECTOR,NYLON,ACCEPTS PCB
THICKNESS 1/16 IN,UP TO 3/32 IN,WHITE
320093 4
494724 4
5-9
5502A
Service Manual
5-10
Figure 5-3. Chassis Assembly
hvw203.eps
Reference
Designator
W1
W2
W3
W4
Table 5-4. Wiring
Description
CABLE ACCESS,TIE,4.00L,.10W,.75 DIA
CABLE, 20AMP OUTPUT
,WIRE, 6 INCHES GROUND
CABLE, 14 PIN SIP, OPTREX
List of Replaceable Parts
How to Obtain Parts
5
Fluke
Part
Number
Quantity
172080
3473928
626116
1572102
3
1
1
1
5-11
5502A
Service Manual
C32
A32
A32
C32
A32
C32
C32
A32
J107
A32
C32
A1
C1
1
7
J106
J105
6
1
J108
J112
12
7
C1
A1
6
12
J307
A1
C1
A1
C1
J104
A1
C1
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A32
C32
A32
C32
C32
A32
C32
A32
A32
C32
J206
J205
J204
J207
J208
A1
C1
C1
A1
A1
C1
A1
C1
A1
C1
SCOPE OPTION
5-12
Figure 5-4. Wiring Diagram
gjh204.eps
List of Replaceable Parts
How to Obtain Parts
5
Table 5-5. Final Assembly
Reference
Designator
H13-H28
H78-H81
Description
SCREW,6-32 X 0.25,FLAT HD UNDERCUT,PHILLIPS,HEAT
TREATED,MAGNETIC SS,NYLON PATCH
MP3 COVER, INSTRUMENT, BOTTOM
Fluke
Part
Number
Quantity
320093 22
3528217 1
MP8 BOTTOM FOOT, MOLDED 868786 4
MP7 SHIELD, ANALOG, FRONT, STANDARD – On Front Panel Assy 2058617 1
937115 1
A07MP2 SHIELD, CURRENT, On A7 PCA
MP31 CLAMP,TOROID
659935 1
MP48
A05MP3
SHIELD, DISPLAY – On Front Panel Assy
SHIELD, SYNTHESIZED IMPEDANCE, On A5 PCA
661717
104489
1
1
5-13
5502A
Service Manual
5-14
Figure 5-5. Final Assembly
gjh205.eps
Chapter 6
SC300 Option
Introduction
This chapter contains the following information and service procedures for the
SC300 Oscilloscope Calibration Option functions.
• Specifications
• Theory of Operation
• Hardware Adjustments made after Repair
The calibration and verification procedures provide traceable results for all of the
SC300 functions as long as they are performed using the recommended equipment. All of the required equipment along with the minimum specifications, are provided in Table 6-1 under “Equipment Required for Calibration and
Verification.”
The calibration and verification procedures in this chapter are not the ones Fluke uses at the factory. These procedures have been developed to provide you with the ability to calibrate and verify the SC300 at your own site if necessary. You should review all of the procedures in advance to make sure you have the resources to complete them. It is strongly recommended that, if possible, you return your unit to Fluke for calibration and verification.
Hardware adjustments that are made after repair, at the factory or designated
Fluke service centers, are provided in detail.
Maintenance
There are no maintenance techniques or diagnostic remote commands for the
SC300 that are available to users. If your SC300 is not installed or not receiving power, the following error message appears on the display when you press
to access the oscilloscope calibration menus. hvw030i.eps
6-1
5502A
Service Manual
If this message is displayed, and you have the SC300 installed in your Calibrator
Mainframe, you must return the Calibrator Mainframe to Fluke for repair. If you wish to purchase the SC300, contact your Fluke sales representative.
SC300 Specifications
These specifications apply only to the SC300. General specifications that apply to the Calibrator Mainframe can be found in Chapter 1. The specifications are valid providing the Calibrator Mainframe is operated under the conditions specified in Chapter 1, and has completed a warm-up period of at least twice the length of time the calibrator was powered off, up to a maximum of 30 minutes. All
SC300 specifications apply to the end of the cable (PN 945014) supplied with the
Option.
Voltage Function Specifications
Voltage Function
DC Signal into 1 M
AC Square Wave Signal
Ω
into 1 M
Ω
Amplitude Characteristics
Range
Resolution
Adjustment Range
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
± 5 °C
0 V to
± 2.2 V 0 V to ± 33 V
1.8 mV to
2.2 V p-p
1.8 mV to
105 V p-p [1]
< 100 V: 4 digits or 10
μV, whichever is greater
≥100 V: 5 digits
Continuous
[1]
± (0.25% of output + 100 μV)
[2]
Sequence 1-2-5 (e.g., 10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV)
Square Wave Frequency Characteristics
Range
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
± 5 °C
10 Hz to 10 kHz [3]
± (25 ppm of setting + 15 mHz)
Typical Aberration within 20
μs from leading edge
< (2% of output + 100
μV)
[1] The square wave signal into 1 M
Ω is a positive square wave from 1.8 mV to 55 V p-p. From 95 V to
105 V, its output is a square wave-like signal that alternates between the negative peak and the positive peak, with the centerline at –10 V. Signals between 55 V and 95 V p-p are not available.
[2] The uncertainty for 50
Ω loads does not include the input impedance uncertainty of the oscilloscope. Square wave signals below 4.5 mV p-p have an uncertainty of
± (0.25% of output +
200 µV). Signals from 95 to 105 V p-p have an uncertainty of 0.5% of output in the frequency range
100 Hz to 1 kHz. Typical uncertainty is 1.5% of output for 95 to 105 V p-p signals in the frequency range 10 Hz to 100 Hz, and 0.5% of output in the frequency range 1 kHz to 10 kHz.
[3] From 95 V to 105 V, the output is a square wave-type signal that alternates between the negative peak and the positive peak, with the centerline at –10 V. If the oscilloscope you are calibrating requires a fixed period for the square wave’s peak-to-peak amplitude, you may need to adjust the
Calibrator Mainframe’s frequency output to accommodate for this waveform. For example, the Fluke
ScopeMeter® has a calibration point at 1 kHz (1 ms), 100 V, peak-to-peak. To output a period of
1 ms at 100 V peak-to-peak, use a frequency of 356 Hz.
6-2
SC300 Option
SC300 Specifications
6
Edge Function Specifications
Amplitude
Range (p-p)
Edge Characteristics into 50
Ω
4.5 mV to 2.75 V
Adjustment Range
Sequence
± 10% around each sequence value (indicated below)
5 mV, 10 mV, 25 mV, 50 mV,
100 mV, 250 mV, 500 mV, 1 V,
2.5 V
Other Edge Characteristics
Frequency Range
Rise Time
Leading Edge Aberrations
Typical Duty Cycle
1 kHz to 1 MHz
< 400 ps within 10 ns
10 to 30 ns after 30 ns
45% to 55%
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
± 5 °C
± (2% of output + 200 μV)
± (25 ppm of setting + 15 mHz)
< (3% of output + 2 mV)
< (1% of output + 2 mV)
< (0.5% of output + 2 mV)
6-3
5502A
Service Manual
Leveled Sine Wave Function Specifications
Leveled Sine Wave
Characteristics into
50
Ω
Amplitude Characteristics
50 kHz Reference
Frequency Range
50 kHz to 100 MHz 100 to 300 MHz
[1]
Range (p-p) 5 mV to 5.5 V
[1]
Resolution
Adjustment Range
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty, tcal
± 5 °C
± (2% of output
+ 200
μV)
< 100 mV: 3 digits
≥ 100 mV: 4 digits continuously adjust
± (3.5% of output
+ 300
μV)
± (4% of output
+ 300
μV)
Flatness (relative to 50 kHz)
Short-term Stability not applicable
± (1.5% of output
+ 100
μV)
≤ 1%
[2]
± (2.0% of output
+ 100
μV)
Frequency Characteristics
Resolution 10 Hz 10 kHz
[3]
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty, tcal
± 5 °C
Distortion Characteristics
± (25 ppm + 15 mHz) ± 25 ppm
[4]
± 25 ppm
2nd Harmonic
3rd and Higher Harmonics
≤ -33 dBc
≤ -38 dBc
[1] Extended frequency range to 350 MHz is provided, but flatness is not specified. Amplitude is limited to 3 V for frequencies above 250 MHz.
[2] Within one hour after reference amplitude setting, provided temperature varies no more than
± 5°C.
[3] At frequencies below 120 kHz, the resolution is 10 Hz. For frequencies between 120 kHz and
999.9 kHz, the resolution is 100 Hz.
[4]
± (25 ppm + 15 mHz) for frequencies of 1 MHz and below.
6-4
SC300 Option
SC300 Specifications
6
Time Marker Function Specifications
Time Marker into
50
Ω
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty, tcal
±5 °C
[3]
±(25 + t*1000) ppm
[1]
±(25 + t* 15,000) ppm
[1]
Wave Shape pulsed sawtooth pulsed sawtooth
> 1 V pk > 1 V pk Typical Output Level
Sequence (cardinal points)
Adjustment Range
± 25 ppm pulsed sawtooth
> 1 V pk
At least
± 10% around each cardinal points.
10 ns to 2 ns
± 25 ppm
> 2 V p-p
[2]
5-2-1 from 5 s to 2 ns (e.g., 500 ms, 200 ms, 100 ms) sine
[1] tcal is the time in seconds. Examples: At 5 s the uncertainty is 5,025 ppm; At 50
μs the uncertainty is ppm.
[2] The 2 ns time marker is typically >0.5 V p-p.
[3] Away from the cardinal points, add
±50 ppm to uncertainty.
Wave Generator Specifications
Wave Generator Characteristics
Square Wave, Sine Wave, and Triangle Wave into 50
Ω or 1 MΩ
Amplitude
Range into 1 M
Ω: 1.8 mV to 55 V p-p into 50
Ω: 1.8 mV to 2.2 V p-p
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
± 5 °C,
10 Hz to 10 kHz
Sequence
Typical DC Offset Range
± (3% of p-p output + 100 µV)
1-2-5 (e.g., 10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV)
0 to
± (≥40% of p-p amplitude)
[1]
Frequency
Range 10 Hz to 100 kHz
Resolution
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
± 5 °C
4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency
± (25 ppm + 15 mHz)
[1] The dc offset plus the wave signal must not exceed 30 V rms.
6-5
5502A
Service Manual
Trigger Signal Specifications for the Time Marker Function
Time Marker
Period
5 to 50 ms
20 ms to 100 ns
50 to 10 ns
5 to 2 ns
Division
off/1 off/1/10/100 off/10/100 off/100
Amplitude into
50
Ω (p-p)
≥ 1 V
≥ 1 V
≥ 1 V
≥ 1 V
Trigger Signal Specifications for the Edge Function
Edge Signal
Frequency
1 kHz to 1 MHz
Division Ratio
off/1
Amplitude into
50
Ω (p-p)
≥ 1 V
Typical Rise Time
≤ 2 ns
≤ 2 ns
≤ 2 ns
≤ 2 ns
Typical Rise Time
≤ 2 ns
Theory of Operation
The following discussion provides a brief overview of the following SC300 operating modes: voltage, edge, leveled sine wave, time marker and wave generator. This discussion will allow you to identify which of the main plug-in boards of the Calibrator Mainframe are defective. Figure 6-1 shows a block diagram of the SC300 Option, also referred to as the A50 board. Functions that are not depicted in the figure are generated from the DDS Assembly (A6 board).
For a diagram of all Calibrator Mainframe board assemblies, refer to Figure 2-1.
Voltage Mode
All signals for the voltage function are generated from the A6 board and are passed to the A50 board via the SCOPE_HV signal line. The generated signal
(ac or dc) is then passed from the A50 board to the A90, attenuator assembly, where range attenuation occurs. The signal is then passed to the SCOPE output
BNC on the front panel.
Edge Mode
The edge clock originates on the A50 board. The signal is then shaped and split to generate the fast edge and external trigger signals. The edge signal is passed from the A50 board first to the attenuator assembly (where range attenuation occurs) and then to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel. If turned on, the trigger is connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel.
Leveled Sine Wave Mode
All of the leveled sine wave signals (from 50 kHz to 350 MHz) are produced on the A50 board. The leveled sine wave signal is passed from the A50 board to the on-board attenuator assembly. The attenuator assembly provides range attenuation and also contains a power detector which maintains amplitude flatness across the frequency range. The signal is then passed to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
6-6
SC300 Option
Theory of Operation
6
Time Marker Mode
There are several “ranges” of time marker operation: 5 s to 50 ms, 20 ms to 100 ns, 50 ns to 20 ns, 10 ns and 5 to 2 ns.
The 5 s to 50 ms markers are generated on the A6 DDS board and are passed to the A50 board. The signal path is also split to drive the external trigger circuitry on the A50 board. If turned on, the trigger is connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel. The marker signal passing through the A50 board is connected up to the attenuator assembly. The signal is then passed to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
The 20 ms to 2 ns markers are generated on the A50 board. From 20 ms to 100 ns, a 20 % duty cycle square wave is produced in addition to the spike and square wave markers. From 50 ns to 20 ns, only spike or square waves are produced. At 10 ns, the user can chose between the square wave or the leveled sine signal. The marker signal is passed from the A50 board to the attenuator assembly and then to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
The trigger signal is also generated on the A50 board. If the trigger is turned on, the signal is connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel.
Wave Generator Mode
All signals for the wavegen function are generated from the A6 board and are passed to the A50 board. They are then sent to the attenuator assembly, where range attenuation occurs. Wavegen signals are then sent to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel. The Wave Generator Square Wave is identical to the AC Square Wave Voltage.
6-7
5502A
Service Manual
LF PWB
DDS
50
Ω
Time Mark II
Analog Shaped
2
μs - 10 μs
Time Mark III
Pulse Shaped
20
μs - 1 μs
LF Mux.
Trigger
÷1,10,100,1000
Oscilloscope
Calibrator
Trigger BNC
External
Clock In
Leveled Sine Wave and Time Mark IV
Unleveled
Leveled
PLLs
Pwr Amp.
Leveling Loop
HF Mux.
HF PWB
Step Attenuator Module
SCOPE
Output BNC
HF Mux.
8dB,20dB,20dB pp detect
Level
Edge
10 MHz Clock om053f.eps
Figure 6-1. SC300 Block Diagram
6-8
SC300 Option
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification
6
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification
Table 6-1 lists the equipment, recommended models, and minimum specifications required for each calibration and verification procedure.
6-1. SC300 Calibration and Verification Equipment
Instrument
Digital
Multimeter
Model
Minimum Use Specifications
Wave Generator, Edge Amplitude Calibration, AC Voltage Verification
HP 3458A
Voltage
1.8 mV to
± 105 V p-p Uncertainty: 0.06%
Edge 4.5 mV to 2.75 V p-p Uncertainty: 0.06%
Termination
Calibration and AC Voltage Verification)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
Edge Rise Time and Aberrations Verification
High-
Frequency
Digital Storage
Oscilloscope
Attenuator
Tektronix 11801 with
Tektronix SD-22/26 sampling head, or
Tektronix TDS 820 with
8 GHz bandwidth
Resolution 4.5 mV to 2.75 V
Weinschel 9-10 (SMA) or Weinschel 18W-10 or equivalent
10 dB, 3.5 mm (m/f)
Adapter
BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration and Verification
AC
Measurement
Standard
Fluke 5790A
Range 5 mV p-p to 5.5 V p-p
Termination
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
DC and AC Voltage Calibration and Verification, DC Voltage Verification
Digital
Multimeter
HP 3458A
Termination
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
6-9
5502A
Service Manual
Table 6-1. SC300 Calibration and Verification Equipment (cont.)
Instrument Model Minimum Use Specifications
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification
Frequency
Counter
PM 6680 with option (PM 9621, PM 9624, or
PM 9625) and (PM 9678)
50 kHz to 350 MHz, < 1.6 ppm uncertainty
Adapter Pomona #3288 BNC(f) to Type N(m)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
Adapter
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness (Low Frequency) Calibration and Verification
AC Measurement Fluke 5790A
Standard with -03 option
Pomona #3288
Range
Frequency
5 mV p-p to 5.5 V p-p
50 kHz to 10 MHz
BNC(f) to Type N(m)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
Spectrum Analyzer
Adapter
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification
HP 8590A
Pomona #3288 BNC(f) to Type N(m)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
Frequency Counter
BNC Cable
Frequency Counter
BNC Cable
PM 6680
(supplied with SC300)
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness (High Frequency) Calibration and Verification
Power Meter
Hewlett-Packard
E4418A
Range -42 to +5.6 dBm
Frequency
Power Sensor Hewlett-Packard 8482A Range
Frequency
Power Sensor Hewlett-Packard 8481D Range
Frequency
10 - 300 MHz
-20 to +19 dBm
10 - 300 MHz
-42 to -20 dBm
10 - 300 MHz
30 dB
Reference
Attenuator
Adapter
Hewlett-Packard
11708A
(supplied with HP
8481D)
Hewlett-Packard
PN 1250-1474
BNC(f) to Type N(f)
BNC Cable
Edge Frequency, AC Voltage Frequency Verification
PM 6680 with option (PM
9678)
20 ms to 150 ns, 10 Hz to 10 MHz: < 1.6 ppm uncertainty
(supplied with SC300)
Edge Duty Cycle
(supplied with SC300)
6-10
SC300 Option
SC300 Calibration Setup
6
Table 6-1. SC300 Calibration and Verification Equipment (cont.)
Instrument Model Minimum Use Specifications
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency, Time Marker Verification
Frequency
Counter
Adapter
PM 6680 with option
(PM 9621, PM 9624, or
PM 9625) and (PM
9678)
Pomona #3288
2 ns to 5 s, 50 kHz to 500 MHz: < 1.6 ppm uncertainty
BNC(f) to Type N(m)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
Wave Generator Verification
AC
Measurement
Fluke 5790A
Standard
Range
Frequency
1.8 mV p-p to 55 V p-p
10 Hz to 100 kHz
Termination
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
Feedthrough 50
Ω ± 1%.
SC300 Calibration Setup
The procedures in this manual have been developed to provide users the ability to calibrate the SC300 at their own site if they are required to do so. It is strongly recommended that, if possible, you return your unit to Fluke for calibration and verification. The unit should be returned with its cable. The Calibrator Mainframe must be fully calibrated prior to performing any of the SC300 calibration procedures.
The hardware adjustments are intended to be one-time adjustments performed in the factory, however, adjustment may be required after repair. Hardware adjustments must be performed prior to calibration. Calibration must be performed after any hardware adjustments. See “Hardware Adjustments” in this chapter.
The AC Square Wave Voltage function is dependent on the DC Voltage function.
Calibration of the AC Voltage function is required after the DC Voltage is calibrated.
The Calibrator Mainframe must complete a warm-up period and the SC300 must be enabled for at least 5 minutes prior to calibration to allow internal components to thermally stabilize. The Calibrator Mainframe warm-up period is at least twice the length of time the calibrator was powered off, up to a maximum of 30 minutes. The SC300 is enabled by pressing the front panel indicator on the
key. The green
key will be illuminated when the SC300 is enabled.
Much of the SC300 can be calibrated interactively from the front panel. Enable the SC300 and wait at least 5 minutes. Enter Scope Cal mode by pressing the front panel key, CAL blue softkey, second CAL blue softkey, and SCOPE
CAL blue softkey. Entering Scope Cal mode prior to having the SC300 enabled for at least 5 minutes will cause a warning message to be displayed.
All equipment specified for SC300 calibration must be calibrated, certified traceable if traceability is to be maintained, and operating within their normal specified operating environment. It is also important to ensure that the equipment
6-11
5502A
Service Manual
has had sufficient time to warm up prior to its use. Refer to each equipment’s operating manual for details.
Before you begin calibration, you may wish to review all of the procedures in advance to ensure you have the resources to complete them.
The Calibrator Mainframe first prompts the user to calibrate the DC Voltage function. If another function is to be calibrated, alternately press the OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the desired function is reached.
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Functions
The AC Voltage and Edge functions have square wave voltages that need to be calibrated and verified. The HP3458A digital multimeter can be programmed from either the front panel or over the remote interface to make these measurements.
Overview of HP3458A Operation
The Hewlett-Packard 3458A digital multimeter is setup as a digitizer to measure the peak-to-peak value of the signal. It is set to DCV, using various analog-todigital integration times and triggering commands to measure the topline and baseline of the square wave signal.
Setup for Square Wave Measurements
By controlling the HP 3458A’s integration and sample time, it can be used to make accurate, repeat measurements of both the topline and baseline of the square wave signals up to 10 kHz.
The HP 3458A is triggered by a change in input level. The trigger level is set to
1% of the DCV range, with ac coupling of the trigger signal. The delay after the trigger event is also changed for the of AC Voltage Square Wave and Edge functions. See Table 6-2 and Figure 6-2.
Table 6-2. AC Square Wave Voltage and Edge Settings for the HP3458A
HP 3458A Settings
Voltage
Input Frequency
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
1
.1
NPLC
.01
.002
.001
DELAY (topline)
.02 s
.002 s
.0002 s
.00004 s
.00002 s
DELAY (baseline)
.07 s
.007 s
.0007 s
.00014 s
.00007 s
Note
For this application, if making measurements of a signal > 1 kHz, the
HP 3458A has been known to have .05% to .1% peaking in the 100 mV range. For these signals, lock the HP 3458A to the 1 V range.
6-12
HP 3458A
SC300 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Functions
6
SC300 Cable
5502A-SC300
5502A
CALIBRATOR
50 Feedthrough
Termination
BNC(F) to
Double Banana
Adapter hvw062f.eps
Figure 6-2. Equipment Setup for SC300 Square Wave Measurements.
For all measurements, the HP 3458A is in DCV, manual ranging, with level triggering enabled. A convenient method to make these measurements from the
HP 3458A’s front panel is to program these settings into several of the user defined keys on its front panel. For example, to make topline measurements at 1 kHz, you would set the DMM to “NPLC .01; LEVEL 1; DELAY .0002; TRIG
LEVEL”. To find the average of multiple readings, you can program one of the keys to “MATH OFF; MATH STAT” and then use the “RMATH MEAN” function to recall the average or mean value. Refer to Figure 6-2 for the proper connections.
DC Voltage Calibration
This procedure uses the following equipment:
• Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
• Shorted Dual Banana Connector
• BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
• BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Note
Full calibration of the Voltage Function requires both dc and ac calibration.
6-13
5502A
Service Manual
Refer to Figure 6-2 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe in Scope Cal mode, DC Voltage section. Follow these steps to calibrate DC Voltage:
1. Connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the BNC cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, Auto Range, NPLC = 10, FIXEDZ = on.
3. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
4. Ensure the HP 3458A reading is 0.0 V DC ± 100 μV.
5. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
6. Calibration voltages 33 V and greater will automatically put the Calibrator
Mainframe output in standby. When this occurs, press on the Calibrator
Mainframe to activate the output. Allow the HP 3458A DC voltage reading to stabilize. Enter the reading via the Calibrator Mainframe front panel keypad, then press ENTER.
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe will warn when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs recheck the setup and carefully reenter the reading insuring proper multiplier (i.e., m, warning still occurs, repair may be necessary.
μ
, n, p). If the
7. Repeat steps 6 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the next steps calibrate ac voltage. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
AC voltage must now be calibrated. Continue with the next section.
AC Square Wave Voltage Calibration
This procedure uses the same equipment and setup as DC Voltage calibration but requires different settings on the HP 3458A. See “Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Functions” earlier in this section for technical details on the procedure. DC voltages are measured and entered in the Calibrator Mainframe to calibrate the AC Voltage function.
Set up the Calibrator Mainframe to Cal ACV. Press OPTIONS and NEXT
SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “The next steps calibrate -SC300
ACV”. Then follow these steps to calibrate ac voltage:
1. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
2. Connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the BNC cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
3. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the
DELAY to .0002 for measuring the upper part of the wave form (i.e. topline), and the DELAY to .0007 for measuring the lower part of the wave form (i.e. baseline). Manually range lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the topline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step.
4. For each calibration step, take samples for at least two seconds, using the
HP 3458A MATH functions to retrieve the average or mean value. See
“Setup for Square Wave Measurements” earlier in this chapter for more details.
6-14
SC300 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Functions
6
The “true amplitude” of the wave form is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements, correcting for the load resistance error. To make this correction, multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload)/Rload), where Rload = actual feedthrough termination resistance if used.
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe will warn when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs recheck the setup and carefully reenter the reading insuring proper multiplier (i.e., m, u, n, p). If the warning still occurs, repair may be necessary.
5. Repeat step 4 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that
WAVEGEN CAL is the next step. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE
CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
Edge Amplitude Calibration
This procedure uses the following equipment:
• Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
• BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
• BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-2 for the proper setup connections. Press the OPTIONS and
NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “Set up to measure fast edge amplitude”. Then follow these steps to calibrate edge amplitude:
1. Connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the BNC cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana.
2. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the
DELAY to .0002 for measuring the upper part of the wave form (i.e. topline), and the DELAY to .0007 for measuring the lower part of the wave form (i.e. baseline). Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the baseline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step. Note that in the EDGE function, the topline is very near 0V, and the baseline is a negative voltage.
3. For each calibration step, take samples for at least two seconds, using the
HP 3458A MATH functions to enter the average or mean value. See “Setup for Square Wave Measurements”, earlier in this section, for more details.
The “true amplitude” of the wave form is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements, correcting for the load resistance error. To make this correction, multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload)/Rload), where Rload = actual feedthrough termination resistance.
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration
This procedure uses the following equipment:
• 5790A AC Measurement Standard
• BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug Adapter
• BNC cable supplied with the SC300
6-15
5502A
Service Manual
Refer to Figure 6-3 for the proper connections.
Press the OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads
“Set up to measure leveled sine amplitude”. Then follow these steps to calibrate
Leveled Sine Wave amplitude:
1. Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector.
Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 50 Ω feedthrough termination then to the 5790A INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2. Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and
Hi Res on.
3. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
4. Press to activate operating mode on the Calibrator Mainframe.
5. Allow the 5790A rms reading to stabilize. Multiply the 5790A reading by (0.5 *
(50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Enter the corrected rms reading via the Calibrator Mainframe front panel keypad, then press
.
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe will warn when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs recheck the setup and calculation and carefully re-enter the corrected rms reading insuring proper multiplier
(i.e., m, u, n, p). If the warning still occurs, repair may be necessary.
6. Repeat step 5 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the next steps calibrate Leveled Sine flatness. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE
CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
5502A
CALIBRATOR
5790A
AC MEASUREMENT
STANDARD
INPUT 1
1000V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
SHUNT
3V RMS MAX
INPUT 2
1000V RMS MAX
HI
LO
WIDEBAND
7V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
10V PEAK
MAX
10V PK
MAX
GROUND GUARD
INPUT1 INPUT1 INPUT1 SHUNT INPUT1
2.2 mV
6
7 mV
0
2.2 mV
22 mV
7
70 mV
1
220 mV
8
700 mV
2
2.2 V
9
3
.
22 V 220 mV
+/-
4 5
1kV
ENTER
DELETE
CLEAR
AUTO MAN
VIEW
REF
SPEC
POWER
I
O hvw034f.eps
Figure 6-3. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard
6-16
SC300 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Functions
6
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Calibration
Leveled Sine Wave flatness calibration is divided into two frequency bands: 50 kHz to 10 MHz (low frequency) and > 10 MHz to 300 MHz (high frequency). The equipment setups are different for each band. Flatness calibration of the low frequency band is made relative to 50 kHz. Flatness calibration of the high frequency band is made relative to 10 MHz.
Leveled Sine Wave flatness is calibrated at multiple amplitudes. Both low and high frequency bands are calibrated at each amplitude. Calibration begins with the low frequency band, then the high frequency band for the first amplitude, followed by the low frequency band, then the high frequency band for the second amplitude, and so on, until the flatness calibration is complete.
Press the OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads
“Set up to measure leveled sine flatness”.
Low Frequency Calibration
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector to the 5790A WIDEBAND input as described under “Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness”.
Follow these steps to calibrate low frequency Leveled Sine Wave flatness for the amplitude being calibrated:
1. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
2. Establish the 50 kHz reference:
• Allow the 5790A rms reading to stabilize.
• Press the 5790A Set Ref blue softkey. (Clear any previous reference by pressing the 5790A Clear Ref blue softkey prior to setting the new reference if required.)
3. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
4. Adjust the amplitude using the Calibrator Mainframe front panel knob until the
5790A reference deviation matches the 50 kHz reference within 1000 ppm.
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the reference frequency is now 10 MHz. Continue with the high frequency calibration.
6-17
5502A
Service Manual
High Frequency Calibration
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector to the power meter and power sensor as described in, “Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness” later in this section.
Follow these steps to calibrate high frequency Leveled Sine Wave flatness for the amplitude being calibrated.
1. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
2. Establish the 10 MHz reference:
• Press the power meter SHIFT key, then FREQ key and use the arrow keys to enter the power sensor’s 10 MHz Cal Factor. Ensure that the factor is correct, then press the power meter ENTER key.
• Allow the power meter reading to stabilize.
• Press the Power meter REL key.
3. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
4. Press the power meter SHIFT key, then FREQ key and use the arrow keys to enter the power sensor’s Cal Factor for the frequency displayed on the
Calibrator Mainframe. Ensure that the factor is correct, then press the power meter ENTER key.
5. Adjust the amplitude using the Calibrator Mainframe front panel knob until the power sensor reading matches the 10 MHz reference within 0.1%.
6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that either the reference frequency is now 50 kHz or that the next steps calibrate pulse width. Repeat the low frequency calibration procedure for the next amplitude unless the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the next steps calibrate pulse width. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
Verification
All of the Oscilloscope Calibration functions should be verified at least once per year, or each time the SC300 is calibrated. The verification procedures in this section provide traceable results; however the factory uses different procedures and instruments of higher precision than those described here. The procedures in this manual have been developed to provide users the ability to verify the
SC300 at their own site if they are required to do so. Fluke strongly recommends that, if possible, you return your unit to Fluke for calibration and verification.
All equipment specified for SC300 verification must be calibrated, certified traceable if traceability is to be maintained, and operating within their normal specified operating environment. It is also important to ensure that the equipment has had sufficient time to warm up prior to its use. Refer to each equipment’s operating manual for details.
Before you begin verification, you may wish to review all of the procedures in advance to ensure you have the resources to complete them.
6-18
SC300 Option
Verification
6
DC Voltage Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
• Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
• BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
• BNC cable supplied with the SC300
For DC voltage verification, refer to Figure 6-2 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Volt menu on the display.
Then use the next sections to verify the DC Voltage function.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
For the 1 M
Ω verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
Make sure the Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to 1 M
Ω (The blue softkey under Output Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω and 1 MΩ).
1. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, Auto Range, NPLC = 10, FIXEDZ = on.
2. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage listed in Table 6-3.
Press on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
3. Allow the HP 3458A reading to stabilize, then record the HP 3458A reading for each voltage in Table 6-3.
4. Compare result to the tolerance column.
Verification at 50
Ω
For the 50
Ω verification, connect the SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the cable and the 50
Ω termination connected to the BNC to Banana Plug adapter.
Make sure the Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to 50
Ω (The blue softkey under Output Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω and 1 MΩ).
1. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, Auto Range, NPLC = 10, FIXEDZ = on.
2. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage listed in Table 6-4.
Press on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
3. Allow the HP 3458A reading to stabilize, then record the HP 3458A reading for each voltage in Table 6-4.
Multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Compare result to the tolerance (1-year spec.) column.
6-19
5502A
Service Manual
Nominal Value (dc)
250.0 mV
-250.0 mV
450.0 mV
-450.0 mV
500.0 mV
-500.0 mV
3.3 V
-3.3 V
4.0 V
-4.0 V
33.0 V
-33.0 V
0.0 mV
5.0 mV
-5.0 mV
22.0 mV
-22.0 mV
25.0 mV
-25.0 mV
45.0 mV
-45.0 mV
50.0 mV
-50.0 mV
220.0 mV
-220.0 mV
Table 6-3. DC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
Measured Value (dc) Deviation (mV)
1.22
1.35
1.35
8.35
8.35
10.10
10.10
82.60
82.60
0.23
0.23
0.65
0.65
0.72
0.72
1.22
1-Year Spec.
(mV)
0.10
0.11
0.11
0.15
0.15
0.16
0.16
0.21
0.21
6-20
Nominal Value (dc)
0.0 mV
5.0 mV
-5.0 mV
10.0 mV
-10.0 mV
22.0 mV
-22.0 mV
25.0 mV
-25.0 mV
55.0 mV
-55.0 mV
100.0 mV
-100.0 mV
220.0 mV
-220.0 mV
250.0 mV
-250.0 mV
550.0 mV
-550.0 mV
700.0 mV
-700.0 mV
2.2 V
-2.2 V
Table 6-4. DC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
Measured Value (dc) Deviation (mV)
SC300 Option
Verification
6
1.47
1.47
1.85
1.85
5.60
5.60
0.24
0.24
0.35
0.35
0.65
0.65
0.72
0.72
1-Year Spec.
(mV)
0.10
0.11
0.11
0.12
0.12
0.15
0.15
0.16
0.16
6-21
5502A
Service Manual
AC Voltage Amplitude Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
• Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
• BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
• BNC cable supplied with the SC300
For ac voltage amplitude verification, refer to Figure 6-2 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Volt menu on the display.
Then proceed with the next sections to verify the AC Voltage function.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
For the 1 M
Ω verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter. Connect the Calibrator Mainframe
TRIG OUT connector to the HP 3458A Ext Trig connector located on the rear of that instrument.
Make sure the Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to 1 M
Ω. (The blue softkey under Output Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω and 1 MΩ.)
1. When making measurements at 1 kHz, set the HP 3458A to the values shown in Table 6-2. Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the topline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step.
2. Measure the topline first. For each measurement, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A MATH functions to determine the average or mean value. See “Setup Square Wave Measurements” earlier in this section for more details.
3. Measure the baseline of each output after the corresponding topline measurement. The peak-to-peak value is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements. Compare the result to the tolerance (1-year spec.) column.
4. When making measurements at the other frequencies, set up the HP 3458A
(NPLC and topline and baseline DELAY) per Table 6-2.
6-22
SC300 Option
Verification
6
Table 6-5. AC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
Nominal Value (p-p) Frequency Measured Value (p-p) Deviation (mV) 1-Year Spec. (mV)
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
10 Hz
100 Hz
0.11
0.11
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
10.0 mV
20.0 mV
20.0 mV
20.0 mV
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
0.11
0.11
0.11
0.12
0.15
0.15
0.15
10.0 V
20.0 V
50.0 V
50.0 V
50.0 V
50.0 V
105.0 V
105.0 V
50.0 mV
89.0 mV
89.0 mV
100.0 mV
200.0 mV
200.0 mV
200.0 mV
500.0 mV
890.0 mV
890.0 mV
1.0 V
1.0 V
1.0 V
2.0 V
5.0 V
5.0 V
10 kHz
10 Hz
10 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
25.10
50.10
125.10
125.10
125.10
125.10
262.60
262.60
1.35
2.32
2.32
2.60
2.60
2.60
5.10
12.60
12.60
0.23
0.32
0.32
0.35
0.60
0.60
0.60
6-23
5502A
Service Manual
Nominal Value
(p-p)
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
10.0 mV
10.0 mV
10.0 mV
20.0 mV
44.9 mV
44.9 mV
50.0 mV
100.0 mV
100.0 mV
100.0 mV
200.0 mV
449.0 mV
449.0 mV
Verification at 50
Ω
For the 50 Ω verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe, the external 50 Ω termination, and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter. (The
50 Ω termination is closest to the HP 3458A input.) Make sure the Calibrator
Mainframe impedance is set to 50 Ω. (The blue softkey under Output Z toggles the impedance between 50 Ω and 1 MΩ). Proceed with the following steps:
1. Set the HP 3458A to the values shown in Table 6-2. Manually lock the HP
3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the topline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step.
2. Measure the topline first, as indicated in Table 6-6. For each measurement, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A MATH functions to determine the average or mean value. See “Setup for Square Wave
Measurements” for more details.
3. Measure the baseline of each output after the corresponding topline measurement, as indicated in Table 6-6. The peak-to-peak value is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements. Multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error.
Compare the result to the tolerance column.
Table 6-6. AC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
Frequency
Measured Value
(p-p)
Deviation
(mV)
10 kHz
10 Hz
10 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
10 kHz
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
1-Year Spec.
(mV)
0.15
0.21
0.21
0.23
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.60
1.22
1.22
0.11
0.11
0.11
0.11
0.11
0.12
0.12
0.12
6-24
SC300 Option
Verification
6
Nominal Value
(p-p)
500.0 mV
1.0 V
1.0 V
1.0 V
2.0 V
2.0 V
2.0 V
2.0 V
2.0 V
Table 6-6. AC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω (cont.)
Frequency
Measured Value
(p-p)
Deviation
(mV)
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
AC Voltage Frequency Verification
Refer to Figure 6-21 for the proper setup connections.
This procedure uses the following equipment:
• PM 6680 Frequency Counter with an TCXO timebase (Option PM 9678 or equivalent)
• BNC cable supplied with the SC300
1-Year Spec.
(mV)
1.35
2.60
2.60
2.60
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
SC300 Cable
5502A-SC300
5502A
CALIBRATOR
Greater than 50 MHz
PM 6680A
A C hvw063f.eps
Figure 6-4. Frequency Verification Setup
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Volt menu on the display.
Press on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify ac voltage frequency:
6-25
5502A
Service Manual
1. Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 1M Ω impedance, and filter off.
2. Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator
Mainframe to PM 6680 channel A.
3. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 2.1 V at each frequency listed in
Table 6-7.
4. Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed in Table 6-7. Compare to the tolerance column of Table 6-7.
Table 6-7. AC Voltage Frequency Verification
Calibrator Mainframe
Frequency
(output @ 2.1 V p-p)
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
PM 6680 Reading
(Frequency)
0.01525 Hz
0.0175 Hz
0.04 Hz
0.265 Hz
Tolerance
Edge Amplitude Verification
For the Edge Amplitude verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the cable supplied with the Calibrator
Mainframe, the external 50
Ω termination, and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter. (The 50
Ω termination is closest to the HP 3458A input.)
1. For measurements of a 1 kHz signal, set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01,
LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .0002 for measuring the upper part of the wave form (i.e. topline), and the DELAY to .0007 for measuring the lower part of the wave form (i.e. baseline). For measurements of a 10 kHz signal, set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .001, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .00002 for measuring the topline, and the DELAY to .00007 for measuring the baseline.
2. Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the baseline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step. Note that in the EDGE function, the topline is very near 0 V, and the baseline is a negative voltage. See Table 6-8.
3. For each calibration step, take samples for at least two seconds, using the
HP 3458A MATH functions to enter the average or mean value. See “Setup for Square Wave Measurements” earlier in this section for more details.
4. The peak-to-peak value of the wave form is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements, correcting for the load resistance error.
To make this correction, multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload)/Rload), where Rload = actual feedthrough termination resistance. Record each reading as indicated in Table 6-8.
6-26
SC300 Option
Verification
6
Calibrator
Mainframe Edge
Output
HP 3458A
Range
Table 6-8. Edge Amplification Verification
100 mV, 1 kHz 100 mV dc
1.00V, 1 kHz 1 V dc
5 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
10 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
25 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
50 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
100 mV, 10 kHz 1 V dc
500 mV, 10 kHz 1 V dc
1.00 V, 10 kHz 1 V dc
2.5 V, 10 kHz 10 V dc
Topline
Reading
Baseline
Reading
Peak-to-
Peak
Peak-to-
Peak x
Correction
Tolerance
(
±V)
0.0022
0.0202
0.0003
0.0004
0.0007
0.0012
0.0022
0.0102
0.0202
0.0502
Edge Frequency Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
• PM 6680 Frequency Counter with an ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or
PM 9691)
• BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-4 for proper setup connections. Set the Calibrator Mainframe to
SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu on the display. Press on the Calibrator
Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify Edge frequency:
1. Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 50
Ω impedance, and filter off.
2. Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator
Mainframe to PM 6680 channel A.
3. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 2.5 V at each frequency listed in
Table 6-9.
4. Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed in Table 6-9. Compare to the tolerance column of Table
6-9.
Table 6-9. Edge Frequency Verification
Calibrator Mainframe
Frequency
(output @ 2.5 V p-p)
1 kHz
10 kHz
100 kHz
1 MHz
PM 6680 Reading (Frequency) Tolerance
0.025 Hz
0.25 Hz
2.50 Hz
25.0 Hz
6-27
5502A
Service Manual
Edge Duty Cycle Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
• PM 6680 Frequency Counter
• BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-4 for proper setup connections. Set the Calibrator Mainframe to
SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu on the display. Press on the Calibrator
Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify Edge duty cycle.
1. Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure duty cycle on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 50
Ω impedance, and filter off.
2. Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator
Mainframe to PM 6680 channel A.
3. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 2.5 V at 1 MHz.
4. Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize. Compare the duty cycle reading to
50%
± 5%.
Edge Rise Time Verification
This procedure tests the edge function’s rise time. Aberrations are also checked with the Tektronix 11801 oscilloscope and SD-22/26 sampling head.
The following equipment is used to verify the edge rise time.
• High Frequency Digital Storage Oscilloscope: Tektronix 11801 with Tektronix
SD-22/26 sampling head
• 3 dB attenuator, 3.5 mm (m/f)
• BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter (2)
• BNC cable supplied with the SC300
• second BNC cable
Connect the BNC cable supplied with the SC300 to the Calibrator Mainframe’s
SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to one BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter then to the DSO’s sampling head through the 3 dB attenuator.
Using the second BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter and BNC cable, connect the
Calibrator Mainframe’s TRIG OUT connector to the 11801’s Trigger Input. Refer to Figure 6-22. Set the scope trigger amplitude to “divide by 10”.
6-28
Tek 11801
With 5D26 Sampling Head
3 dB Attenaator
3.5 mm (m/f)
SC300
Cable
SC300 Option
Verification
5502A-SC300
5502A
CALIBRATOR
BNC(F) to
3.5 mm (m)
Adapter hvw064f.eps
Figure 6-5. Edge Rise Time Verification Setup
The Calibrator Mainframe should be in SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu on the display. Press on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Press the softkey under TRIG to select the TRIG/1 External Trigger output. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 250 mV @ 1 kHz. Set the DSO to these parameters:
Digital Storage Oscilloscope Setup
Main Time Base position (initial)
Horizontal scale
Measurement Function
40 ns
500 ps/div
Rise Time
1. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage and frequency listed in Table 6-10. Press on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
2. Change the vertical scale of the DSO to the value listed in the table. Adjust the main time base position and vertical offset until the edge signal is centered on the display. Record the rise time measurement in column A of
Table 6-10. Refer to Figure 6-23.
3. Correct the rise time measurement by accounting for the SD-22/26 sampling head’s rise time. The SD-22/26 rise time is specified as < 28 ps. Column B = sqrt((Column A)
2
- (SD-22/26 rise time)
2
).
4. The edge rise time measured should be less than the time indicated in Table
6-10.
6
6-29
5502A
Service Manual
90%
Rise time measures between these two points
10% om033i.eps
Figure 6-6. Edge Rise Time
Table 6-10. Edge Rise Time Verification
Calibrator Mainframe Output
DSO
Vertical
Axis
A B
11801
Voltage Frequency (mV/div)
Reading
Corrected
Reading
Tolerance
250 mV
500 mV
1 V
2.5 V
1 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
20.0
50.0
100.0
200.0
< 400 ps
< 400 ps
< 400 ps
< 400 ps
Edge Aberration Verification
The following equipment is needed for this procedure:
• Tektronix 11801 oscilloscope with SD22/26 sampling head
• Output cable provided with the SC300
• Use the same trigger setup found in the “Edge Rise Time Verification” section.
Before you begin this procedure, verify that the 5520A-SC300 is in the edge mode (the Edge menu is displayed), and program it to output 1 V p-p @ 1 MHz.
Press to activate the output.
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe to the oscilloscope as in Figure 6-22. Set the oscilloscope vertical to 10 mV/div and horizontal to 1 ns/div. Set the oscilloscope to look at the 90% point of the edge signal; use this point as the reference level.
Set the oscilloscope to look at the first 10 ns of the edge signal with the rising edge at the left edge of the oscilloscope display.
With these settings, each vertical line on the oscilloscope represents a 1% aberration. Determine that the SC300 falls within the typical specifications shown in Table 6-11.
6-30
SC300 Option
Verification
6
Table 6-11. Edge Aberrations
Time from 50% of Rising Edge
0 - 10 ns
10 - 30 ns
> 30 ns
Typical Edge Aberrations
< 22 mV (2.2%)
< 12 mV (1.2%)
< 7 mV (0.7%)
Leveled Sine Wave Reference Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
• 5790A AC Measurement Standard
• BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug adapter
• 50Ω feedthrough termination
• BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-3 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Levsine menu on the display. Press on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify the leveled sine wave amplitude.
1. Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector.
Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 50
Ω feedthrough termination then to the 5790A INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2. Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and
Hi Res on.
3. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage listed in Table 6-12.
4. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then record the 5790A’s rms reading for each voltage listed in Table 6-12.
5. Multiply the rms reading by the conversion factor of 2.8284 to convert it to the peak-to-peak value.
6. Multiply the peak-to-peak value by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload
= the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Compare result to the tolerance column.
6-31
5502A
Service Manual
Table 6-12. Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Verification
Calibrator
Mainframe output
(@ 50 kHz)
5.0 mV
10.0 mV
20.0 mV
40.0 mV
50.0 mV
100.0 mV
200.0 mV
400.0 mV
500.0 mV
1.3 V
2.0 V
5.5 V
5790A Reading
(V rms)
5790A Reading x 2.8284
(V p-p)
Tolerance
(V p-p)
0.4 mV
0.5 mV
0.7 mV
1.1 mV
1.3 mV
2.3 mV
4.3 mV
8.3 mV
10.3 mV
0.0263 V
0.0403 V
0.1103 V
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
• PM 6680 Frequency Counter with a prescaler for the Channel C input
(Option PM 9621, PM 9624, or PM 9625) and ovenized timebase (Option PM
9690 or PM 9691)
• BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
• BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-4 for the proper setup connections. Set the Calibrator
Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Levsine menu on the display. Then follow these steps to verify the leveled sine wave amplitude.
1. Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, and 50
Ω impedance.
2. Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator
Mainframe to the PM 6680 at the channel indicated in Table 6-13. You will need the BNC-N adapter for the connection to Channel C.
3. Set the filter on the PM 6680 as indicated in the table.
4. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output as listed in Table 6-13. Press
on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
5. Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed in Table 6-13.
6-32
Table 6-13. Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification
Calibrator Mainframe
Frequency
(output @ 5.5 V p-p)
50 kHz
500 kHz
5 MHz
50 MHz
300 MHz
A
A
A
A
PM 6680 Settings
Channel
C
Filter
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
PM 6680 Reading
(Frequency)
Tolerance
1.25 Hz
12.5 Hz
125.0 Hz
1250 Hz
12500 Hz
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
• Hewlett-Packard 8590A Spectrum Analyzer
• BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
• BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-24 for proper setup connections.
SC300 Option
Verification
6
HP 8590 5502A-SC300
5502A
CALIBRATOR
BNC(F) to Type N (M)
Adapter
SC300
Cable hvw066f.eps
Figure 6-7. Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification Setup
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Levsine menu on the display. Then follow these steps to verify the leveled sine wave harmonics.
1. Using the BNC cable and BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to the HP 8590A.
2. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to 5.5 V p-p at each frequency listed in
Table 6-14. Press on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
6-33
5502A
Service Manual
3. Set HP 8590A start frequency to the Calibrator Mainframe output frequency.
Set HP 8590A stop frequency to 10 times the Calibrator Mainframe output frequency. Set the HP 8590A reference level at +19 dBm.
4. Record the harmonic level reading for each frequency and harmonic listed in
Table 6-14. For harmonics 3, 4, and 5, record the highest harmonic level of the three measured. Harmonics should be below the levels listed in the tolerance column of Table 6-14.
Table 6-14. Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification
Calibrator Mainframe
Output Frequency
(@ 5.5 V p-p)
1 MHz
2 MHz
2 MHz
4 MHz
4 MHz
8 MHz
8 MHz
10 MHz
10 MHz
20 MHz
20 MHz
40 MHz
40 MHz
50 kHz
50 kHz
100 kHz
100 kHz
200 kHz
200 kHz
400 kHz
400 kHz
800 kHz
800 kHz
1 MHz
80 MHz
80 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
200 MHz
200 MHz
250 MHz
250 MHz
Harmonic
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
HP 8590A Reading (dB) Tolerance
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
6-34
SC300 Option
Verification
6
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Verification
Leveled Sine Wave flatness verification is divided into two frequency bands: 50 kHz to 10 MHz (low frequency) and > 10 MHz to 300 MHz (high frequency). The equipment setups are different for each band. Leveled Sine Wave flatness is measured relative to 50 kHz. This is determined directly in the low frequency band. The high frequency band requires a “transfer” measurement be made at 10
MHz to calculate a flatness relative to 50 kHz.
Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness
All low frequency flatness procedures use the following equipment:
• 5790A/03 AC Measurement Standard with Wideband option
• BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
• BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector to the 5790A WIDEBAND input with the BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter as shown in Figure 6-8. Set the
5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi Res on.
5502A
CALIBRATOR
5790A
AC MEASUREMENT
STANDARD
INPUT 1
1000V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
SHUNT
3V RMS MAX
INPUT 2
1000V RMS MAX
HI
LO
WIDEBAND
7V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
10V PEAK
MAX
10V PK
MAX
GROUND GUARD
INPUT1 INPUT1 INPUT1 SHUNT INPUT1
2.2 mV
6
7 mV
0
2.2 mV
22 mV
7
70 mV
1
220 mV
8
700 mV
2
2.2 V
9
3 4
.
22 V 220 mV
+/-
5
1kV
ENTER
DELETE
CLEAR
AUTO MAN
VIEW
REF
UTIL
MENUS
SPEC
POWER
I
O hvw034f.eps
Figure 6-8. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard
Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness
All high frequency flatness procedures use the following equipment:
• Hewlett-Packard E4418A Power Meter
• Hewlett-Packard 8482A and 8481D Power Sensors
• BNC(f) to Type N(f) adapter
• BNC cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe
6-35
5502A
Service Manual
Note
When high frequencies at voltages below 63 mV p-p are verified, use the 8481D Power Sensor. Otherwise, use the 8482A Power
Sensor.
Connect the HP E4418A Power Meter to either the 8482A or the 8481D Power
Sensor as shown in Figure 6-9. For more information on connecting the two instruments, see the power meter and power sensor operators manuals.
Connect the power meter/power sensor combination to the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe, as shown in Figure 6-10.
The Hewlett-Packard E4418A Power Meter must be configured by setting the parameters listed below. Zero and self-calibrate the power meter with the power sensor being used. Refer to the Hewlett-Packard E4418A Operators Manual for details.
• PRESET
• WATTS
• SENSOR 0 (default)
OM035f.eps
Figure 6-9. Connecting the HP E4418A Power Meter to the HP 8482A or 8481D Power Sensor
6-36
SC300 Option
Verification
6
5502A CALIBRATOR
hvw036.eps
Figure 6-10. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the HP Power Meter and Power Sensor
6-37
5502A
Service Manual
Low Frequency Verification
This procedure provides an example of testing low frequency flatness using a 5.5
V output. Follow the same procedure for testing other amplitudes, only compare results against the flatness specification listed in Table 6-15.
1. Program the Calibrator Mainframe for an output of 5.5 V @ 500 kHz. Press
on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
2. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize. The 5790A should display approximately 1.94 V rms. Enter the 5790A reading in Column A of Table 6-
15.
3. Enter 50 kHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then enter the 5790A reading in Column B of Table 6-15.
4. Enter the next frequency listed in Table 6-15. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then enter the reading into Column A of the table.
5. Enter 50 kHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then enter the 5790A reading in Column B of Table 6-15.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all of frequencies listed in Table 6-15. Continue until you have completed Columns A and B.
7. When you have completed Columns A and B, press to remove the
Calibrator Mainframe’s output. Complete Table 6-15 by performing the calculations for column C. Compare Column C to the specifications listed in the final column.
Calibrator
Mainframe
Frequency
500 kHz
1 MHz
2 MHz
5 MHz
10 MHz
Table 6-15. Low Frequency Flatness Verification at 5.5 V
A B C
50 kHz
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Specification (%)
± 1.50 + 100 μV
± 1.50 + 100 μV
± 1.50 + 100 μV
± 1.50 + 100 μV
± 1.50 + 100 μV
Complete Columns A-C as follows:
A Enter 5790A Reading (mV) for the present frequency.
B Enter 5790A Reading (mV) for 50 kHz.
C Compute and enter the Calibrator Mainframe Flatness Deviation (%): 100 * ((Column A entry)-
(Column B entry))/ (Column B entry)
High Frequency Verification
This procedure provides an example of testing high frequency flatness using a
5.5 V output. Follow the same procedure for testing other amplitudes, only compare results against the flatness specification listed in Table 6-16. For this voltage range, you will use the model HP 8482A power sensor.
1. Program the Calibrator Mainframe for an output of 5.5 V @ 30 MHz. Press
on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
6-38
SC300 Option
Verification
6
2. Allow the power meter reading to stabilize. The power meter should display approximately 75 mW. Enter the power meter’s reading in Column A of Table
6-16.
3. Enter 10 MHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the power meter reading to stabilize, then enter the power meter’s reading in Column B of Table 6-16.
4. Enter the next frequency listed in Table 6-16. Allow the power meter’s reading to stabilize, then enter the reading into Column A of the table.
5. Enter 10 MHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the power meter reading to stabilize, then enter the power meter’s reading in Column B of Table 6-16.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all of frequencies listed in Table 6-16. Continue until you have completed Columns A and B.
7. When you have completed Columns A and B, press to remove the
Calibrator Mainframe’s output. Complete Table 6-16 by performing the calculations for each column. Compare Column E to the specifications listed in the final column.
Table 6-16. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 5.5 V
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
C D
Flatness Spec. (%)
20
50
± 1.50 +100 uV
± 1.50 +100 uV
100
± 1.50 +100 uV
125
± 2.00 + 100 uV
160
± 2.00 + 100 uV
200
± 2.00 + 100 uV
220
± 2.00 + 100 uV
235
± 2.00 + 100 uV
250
± 2.00 + 100 uV
300
± 2.00 + 100 uV
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A
B
C
D
E
Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W).
Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
6-39
5502A
Service Manual
Table 6-17. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 7.5 mV
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
C D E
20
50
± 1.50 +100 μV
± 1.50 +100 μV
100
± 1.50 +100 μV
125
± 2.00 + 100 μV
160
± 2.00 + 100 μV
200
± 2.00 + 100 μV
220
± 2.00 + 100 μV
235
± 2.00 + 100 μV
250
± 2.00 + 100 μV
300
± 2.00 + 100 μV
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Spec. (%)
A
B
Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W).
C
D
Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
E Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
Table 6-18. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 25 mV
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
Calibrator Mainframe
20
± 1.50 +100 μV
50
± 1.50 +100 μV
100
± 1.50 +100 μV
125
± 2.00 + 100 μV
160
± 2.00 + 100 μV
200
± 2.00 + 100 μV
220
± 2.00 + 100 μV
235
± 2.00 + 100 μV
250
± 2.00 + 100 μV
300
± 2.00 + 100 μV
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A
B
Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W).
C
D
E
Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column
D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
6-40
SC300 Option
Verification
6
Table 6-19. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 70 mV
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
C D E
Flatness Spec. (%)
20
± 1.50 +100 μV
50
± 1.50 +100 μV
100
± 1.50 +100 μV
125
± 2.00 + 100 μV
160
± 2.00 + 100 μV
200
± 2.00 + 100 μV
220
± 2.00 + 100 μV
235
± 2.00 + 100 μV
250
± 2.00 + 100 μV
300
± 2.00 + 100 μV
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
B Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W).
C Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
D Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
E Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
Table 6-20. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 250 mV
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
C D E
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Spec. (%)
20
50
± 1.50 +100 μV
± 1.50 +100 μV
100
± 1.50 +100 μV
125
± 2.00 + 100 μV
160
± 2.00 + 100 μV
200
± 2.00 + 100 μV
220
± 2.00 + 100 μV
235
± 2.00 + 100 μV
250
± 2.00 + 100 μV
300
± 2.00 + 100 μV
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
B Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W).
C Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
D Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
E Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
6-41
5502A
Service Manual
Table 6-21. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 800 mV
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
E
Flatness Spec. (%)
20
50
100
125
160
200
220
235
250
300
± 1.50 +100 μV
± 1.50 +100 μV
± 1.50 +100 μV
± 2.00 + 100 μV
± 2.00 + 100 μV
± 2.00 + 100 μV
± 2.00 + 100 μV
± 2.00 + 100 μV
± 2.00 + 100 μV
± 2.00 + 100 μV
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
B Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W).
C Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
D Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
E Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
Table 6-22. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 3.4 V
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
C D E
Flatness Spec. (%)
20
50
± 1.50 +100 μV
± 1.50 +100 μV
100
± 1.50 +100 μV
125
± 2.00 + 100 μV
160
± 2.00 + 100 μV
200
± 2.00 + 100 μV
220
± 2.00 + 100 μV
235
± 2.00 + 100 μV
250
± 2.00 + 100 μV
300
± 2.00 + 100 μV
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W). B
C Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
D
E
Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
6-42
SC300 Option
Verification
6
Time Marker Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
• PM 6680 Frequency Counter with a prescaler for the Channel C input
(Option PM 9621, PM 9624, or PM 9625) and ovenized timebase (Option PM
9690 or PM 9691)
• BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
• BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-21 for the proper setup connections. Set the PM 6680’s
FUNCTION to measure frequency with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, and 50
Ω impedance.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Marker menu on the display. Press on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to for each period listed in Table 6-23.
1. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to the output as listed in Table 6-23.
2. Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator
Mainframe to the PM 6680 at the channel indicated in Table 6-23. You will need the BNC-N adapter for the connection to Channel C.
3. Set the filter on the PM 6680 as indicated in the table. Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed for the Calibrator Mainframe.
4. Invert the PM 6680’s frequency reading to derive the period. For example, a reading of 1.000006345 kHz has a period of:
1/1.000006345 kHz = 0.999993655 ms.
Record the period in the and compare to the tolerance column.
6-43
5502A
Service Manual
Calibrator
Mainframe
Period
Table 6-23. Time Marker Verification
PM 6680Settings
Channel Filter
PM 6680 Reading
(Frequency)
s On s On
1
PM 6680 Reading
(Period)
Tolerance
50.0
μs
20.0
μs
10.0
μs
1.0
μs ns Off ns Off ns Off ns Off ns 50E-15
6-44
SC300 Option
Verification
6
Wave Generator Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
• 5790A AC Measurement Standard
• BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
• BNC cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe
For wave generation verification procedures, refer to Figure 6-11 for the proper setup connections.
5502A-SC300
5502A
CALIBRATOR
SC300
Cable
BNC (F) to
Double Banana
Adapter
50
Feed Through
Termination hvw065f.eps
Figure 6-11. Wave Generator Verification Setup
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Wavegen menu on the display. Press on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Set the offset to 0 mV, and the frequency to 1 kHz. Then follow these steps to verify the wave generator function.
6-45
5502A
Service Manual
Verification at 1 M
Ω
1. Set the Calibrator Mainframe impedance to 1 M Ω (The blue softkey under
SCOPE Z toggles the impedance between 50 Ω and 1 MΩ).
2. Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector.
Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 5790A INPUT 2 using the
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
3. Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and
Hi Res on.
4. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the wave type and voltage listed in Table 6-24.
5. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then record the 5790A rms reading for each wave type and voltage in Table 6-24.
6. Multiply the rms reading by the conversion factor listed to convert it to the peak-to-peak value. Compare result to the tolerance column.
Verification at 50
Ω
1. Set the Calibrator Mainframe impedance to 50 Ω (The blue softkey under
SCOPE Z toggles the impedance between 50 Ω and 1 MΩ).
2. Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector.
Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 50 Ω feedthrough termination then to the 5790A INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
3. Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and
Hi Res on.
4. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the wave type and voltage listed in Table 6-25.
5. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then record the 5790A rms reading for each wave type and voltage in Table 6-25.
6. Multiply the rms reading by the conversion factor listed to convert it to the peak-to-peak value.
7. Multiply the peak-to-peak value by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload
= the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Compare result to the tolerance column.
6-46
SC300 Option
Verification
6
Calibrator
Mainframe
Wave Type
square square square square square square sine sine sine sine sine triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle
Table 6-24. Wave Generator Verification at 1 M
Ω
Calibrator
Mainframe output
(@ 10 kHz)
5790A
Reading
(V rms)
Conversion
Factor
5790A Reading x
Conversion Factor
(V p-p)
5.0 mV 2.0000
89 mV
219 mV
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
890 mV
6.5 V
2.0000
2.0000
55 V 2.0000 mV 2.8284 mV 2.8284
89 mV
219 mV
890 mV
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
6.5 V
55 V
2.8284
2.8284
3.4641
3.4641
89 mV
219 mV
890 mV
6.5 V
55 V
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
Tolerance
(V p-p)
250.00
2.770 mV
6.670 mV
26.8 mV
195.1 mV
1.65 V
2.770 mV
6.670 mV
26.8 mV
195.1 mV
1.65 V
2.770 mV
6.670 mV
26.8 mV
195.1 mV
1.65 V
μV
6-47
5502A
Service Manual
sine sine sine sine sine
Calibrator
Mainframe
Wave Type
square
Calibrator
Mainframe output
(@ 10 kHz)
Table 6-25. Wave Generator Verification at 50
Ω
5790A
Reading
(V rms)
Conversion
Factor
5790A Reading x
Conversion Factor
(V p-p)
5.0 mV 2.0000
2.0000 square square
45 mV
109 mV square 0.45V square 1.09V square 2.20V
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284 triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle
45 mV
109 mV
0.45 V
1.09 V
2.20 V
45 mV
109 mV
0.45 V
1.09 V
2.20 V
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
Tolerance
(V p-p)
250.00
μV
1.450 mV
3.370 mV
1.450 mV
3.370 mV
13.570 mV
32.500 mV
66.100 mV
1.450 mV
3.370 mV
13.570 mV
32.500 mV
66.100 mV
SC300 Hardware Adjustments
Note
Before beginning SC300 hardware adjustments, it must be determined which revision of the option is installed in the instrument.
To do this, remove the top cover of the calibrator and look at the circuit board tab protruding through the guard cover that is closest to the right front corner of the calibrator. If this tab is marked A4, proceed to the“SC300 Hardware Adjustments for the A4 Board” section of this manual.
Hardware adjustments must be made to the leveled sine and edge functions each time the SC300 is repaired. In addition to the adjustment procedures, this section provides lists of the required equipment and some recommendations on
6-48
SC300 Option
SC300 Hardware Adjustments
6 models that have the capabilities required by these procedures. Equivalent models can be substituted if necessary.
Equipment Required
The following equipment is necessary for performing the hardware adjustments described in this section. The models listed are recommended for providing accurate results.
• Standard adjustment tool for adjusting the pots and trimmer caps
• Extender Card (pn 661865, 5800A-7006K, Extender Kit )
• Oscilloscope Mainframe and Sampling Head (Tektronix 11801 with SD-22/26 or Tektronix TDS 820 with 8 GHz bandwidth)
• 10 dB Attenuator (Weinschel 9-10 (SMA), or Weinschel 18W-10, or equivalent)
• Cable provided with SC300
• Spectrum Analyzer (Hewlett-Packard 8590A)
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function
There is one adjustment procedure that needs to be made for the leveled sine wave function. The procedure adjusts the harmonics.
Equipment Setup
This procedure uses the spectrum analyzer. Before you begin this procedure, verify that the Calibrator Mainframe is in leveled sine wave mode (the Levsine menu is displayed), and program it to output 5.5 V p-p @ 50 MHz. Press to activate the output.
Refer to Figure 6-24 for setup connections and connect the Calibrator Mainframe to the Spectrum Analyzer. Adjust the Spectrum Analyzer so that it displays one peak across its horizontal centerline. The far right of the peak is fixed at the far right of the centerline, as shown below.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics
Note
This procedure should only be used for adjusting the leveled sine wave harmonics. Do not use this procedure as a verification test.
The specifications in this procedure are not valid for verification.
Set the Spectrum Analyzer to the parameters listed below.
Spectrum Analyzer Setup
Start Frequency
Stop Frequency
Resolution Bandwidth
Video Bandwidth
Reference Level
50 MHz
500 MHz
3 MHz
3 kHz
20 dBm
6-49
5502A
Service Manual
Use your Spectrum Analyzer’s Peak Search function to find the desired reference signal. The Analyzer should show the fundamental, and second and third harmonics. The harmonics need to be adjusted so that the second harmonic is at
-34 dBc and third harmonic should typically be greater than or equal to -39 dBc as shown in Figure 6-12.
To adjust the harmonics, adjust R8, as shown in Figure 6-12 until the peaks of the second and third harmonic are at the correct dB level. You may find that you can place the second harmonic at -34 dBc but the third harmonic is less than -39 dBc. If this is the case, continue adjusting R8 until the third harmonic is at –
39dBc and the second harmonic is greater than or equal to –34dBc The second harmonic will fluctuate, but there is a point at which both harmonics will be at the correct decibel level.
6-50
-34 dBc
-39 dBc
R8
2nd harmonic
3rd harmonic yg127f.eps
Figure 6-12. Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics
Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function
Adjustments need to be made after repair to the edge function to adjust the edge aberrations.
Equipment Setup
The following equipment is needed for this procedure:
• Oscilloscope: Tektronix 11801 with SD22/26 input module or Tektronix TDS
820 with 8 GHz bandwidth.
• 20 dB Attenuator: Weinschel 9-20 (SMA) or Weinschel 18W-20 or equivalent
• Output cable provided with the SC300
Before you begin this procedure, verify that the SC300 is in the edge mode (the
Edge menu is displayed), and program it to output 1 V p-p @ 1 MHz. Press to activate the output.
Refer to Figure 6-22 for the proper setup connections and connect the Calibrator
Mainframe to the oscilloscope. Set the oscilloscope vertical to 1 mV/div and horizontal to 1 ns/div. Set the oscilloscope to look at the first 10 ns of the edge signal with the rising edge at the left edge of the oscilloscope display.
SC300 Option
SC300 Hardware Adjustments
6
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations
Refer to Figure 6-13 while making the following adjustments:
1. Set the oscilloscope to display the 90% point of the edge signal. Note this voltage
(or set to center of the display) as it will be used as the reference for the following adjustments.
2. Set the oscilloscope to display the leading edge and the first 10 ns of the edge signal. Adjust A90R13 to set the edge signal at the 10 ns point to the reference level.
3. Adjust A90R12 to flatten out the edge signal. Readjust A90R13 if necessary to keep the edge signal at the reference level.
4. Adjust A90R35 so the first overshoot is the same amplitude as the second aberration.
5. Readjust A90R36 to center the first two aberrations about reference level.
6. Readjust A90R13 if necessary to keep the edge signal at 10 ns to be at the reference level.
7. Readjust A90R36 ,A90R35 or A90R12 to obtain equal amplitudes of the aberrations displayed during the first 10 ns to be equally above and below the reference level. Check the aberrations , compare with specifications. It may be necessary to slow the rise time(A90R35) to reduce the amplitude of the aberrations.
8. Set the UUT output to 2.5 V and the oscilloscope vertical to 2 mV/div. Check the aberrations.
9. Remove the 20 dB attenuator from the oscilloscope input. Connect the UUT to the scope input and program the UUT output to 250 mV.
10. Set the oscilloscope vertical to 5 mV/div. Check the aberrations.
11. Check for rise time < 950 ps ± 25 ps at 250 mV, 1 V, and 2.5 V outputs.
6-51
5502A
Service Manual
1st Aberration
2nd Aberration
3rd Aberration
T
R36
R12
R13
R35
6-52 om050f.eps
Figure 6-13. Adjusting Edge Aberrations
SC300 Hardware Adjustments for the A4 Board
Hardware adjustments must be made to the leveled sine and edge functions each time the SC300 is repaired. In addition to the adjustment procedures, this section provides lists of the required equipment and some recommendations on models that have the capabilities required by these procedures. Equivalent models can be substituted if necessary.
Equipment Required
The following equipment is necessary for performing the hardware adjustments described in this section. The models listed are recommended for providing accurate results.
• Standard adjustment tool for adjusting the pots and trimmer caps
• Oscilloscope Mainframe and Sampling Head (Tektronix 11801B with SD-22)
• Delay Cable, 60 ns
• Spectrum Analyzer (Hewlett Packard 8590A)
SC300 Option
SC300 Hardware Adjustments for the A4 Board
6
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function
There are two adjustment procedures that need to be made for the leveled sine wave function. The first procedure adjusts the balance out of the LO VCO so that the signal is balanced between the two VCOs. The second procedure adjusts the harmonics.
Equipment Setup
This procedure uses the spectrum analyzer. Before you begin this procedure, verify that the Calibrator Mainframe is in leveled sine wave mode (the Levsine menu is displayed), and program it to output 5.5V p-p @ 110 MHz. Press to activate the output.
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe to the Spectrum Analyzer. Adjust the
Spectrum Analyzer so that it displays one peak across its horizontal center line.
The far right of the peak is fixed at the far right of the center line, as shown below.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave VCO Balance
Once you have completed the setup described above, perform the following procedure to adjust the VCO balance for the leveled sine wave function.
1. Program the Calibrator Mainframe for an output of 5.5V @ 110 MHz.
2. Set the Spectrum Analyzer to the parameters listed below.
Spectrum Analyzer Setup
Start Frequency 110 MHz
Stop Frequency
Resolution Bandwidth
Video Bandwidth
113 MHz
30 kHz
3 kHz
Reference Level 20 dBm
The Spectrum Analyzer will display a spur in the waveform approximately
1 MHz away from the carrier frequency. Refer to Figure 6-14 to identify the spur.
3. You need to adjust the wave until the spur disappears. To do this, slowly rotate R44 (shown in the diagram) counterclockwise until the spur just disappears. As you adjust it, the spur will move down the waveform, towards the right. As soon as the spur is gone, stop rotating R44. If you rotate it too far, the spur will reappear.
Once you have turned R44 to the point at which the spur just disappears, the signal is balanced between the VCOs and you have completed the adjustment.
6-53
5502A
Service Manual
6-54
R44 om037f.eps
Figure 6-14. Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Balance
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics
The following procedure adjusts the harmonics for the leveled sine wave function.
Note
This procedure should only be used for adjusting the leveled sine wave harmonics. Do not use this procedure as a verification test.
The specifications in this procedure are not valid for verification.
1. Set the Spectrum Analyzer to the parameters listed below.
Spectrum Analyzer Setup
Start Frequency
Stop Frequency
Resolution Bandwidth
Video Bandwidth
Reference Level
50 MHz
500 MHz
3 MHz
3 kHz
20 dBm
2. Use your Spectrum Analyzer’s Peak Search function to find the desired reference signal. The Analyzer should show the fundamental, and second and third harmonics. The harmonics need to be adjusted so that the second harmonic is at 40 dBc and third harmonic should typically be at 50 dBc as shown in Figure 6-15.
3. To adjust the harmonics, adjust R8, as shown in Figure 6-15 until the peaks of the second and third harmonic are at the correct dB level. You may find that you can place the second harmonic at 40 dBc but the third harmonic is not at 50 dBc. If this is the case, continue adjusting R8. The second harmonic will fluctuate, but there is a point at which both harmonics will be at the correct decibel level.
SC300 Option
SC300 Hardware Adjustments for the A4 Board
6
40 dBc
50 dBc
R57
R168
R16
R1
R8
2nd harmonic
3rd harmonic om038f.eps
Figure 6-15. Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics
Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function
Adjustments need to be made after repair to the edge function to adjust the edge aberrations. There are two SC300 boards currently available, and each requires separate aberration adjustment procedures; thus certain procedure headings include specific part numbers. The two boards are listed below. Check the part number of your board before you begin aberration adjustments. If you are not certain which board you have, contact your Fluke Service Center.
• SC300 Board 5500A-4004-1 (Fluke PN 600749)
• SC300 Board 5500A-4004 (Fluke PN 937383)
Note
To verify the edge aberrations back to national standards, you should send your Calibrator Mainframe to Fluke, or other facility that has established traceability for aberrations. Fluke, for example, has a reference pulse that is sent to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) for characterization. This information is then transferred to high speed sampling heads, which are used to adjust and verify the SC300.
Equipment Setup
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 1V p-p @ 100 kHz. Set the Trigger to /1. Using the 60 ns Delay Cable, connect the SCOPE output of the Calibrator
Mainframe to the SD-22 sampling head on the oscilloscope. Connect the trigger output to the 11801B’s trigger input. Then set the sampling heads to the settings listed below, to establish a reference signal.
In addition to the settings shown below, adjust the scan control for a welltriggered display. (You may need to adjust the signal averaging on the 11801B.)
6-55
5502A
Service Manual
11801B Setup
dc offset
Dot Response
Centered
Centered
Smooth On
Time Base Position 5
μs
Trigger Level Center, negative slope
Trigger Input
External Trigger x10
1 M
Ω
Sequential On
Scan Repetitive On
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations for Board 5500A-4004-1
Follow this procedure only if you have Board 5500A-4004-1 (Fluke PN 600749).
1. Adjust the dc offset on the 11801B so the last 500 ns of the peak of the square wave is on the center line.
2. Change the time/div on the 11801B to 20 ns/div.
3. Slowly adjust pot R168 and observe its effect on the waveform. the left half of the wave peak will move up and down as you turn R168. Adjust R168 until the center of the wave peak is half of a division above the center line, as shown in Figure 6-16.
4. Change the time/div on the 11801B to 5 ns/div.
5. Slowly adjust R57. It will affect the first 50 ns of the wave form. Adjust R57 so the rising edge falls back and crosses the horizontal center line one division before the vertical center. Refer to Figure 6-17. The base of the aberration should be 10 ns apart.
6. Change the time/div on the 11801B to 2 ns/div.
7. Adjust R16 until the rising edge ledge reaches the center line. Refer to Figure
6-18.
8. Return to 5 ns/div and verify that the pattern shown in Figure 6-17 still exists.
Repeat the adjustment in step 5 if necessary.
9. At this point in the adjustment, each graticule line on the oscilloscope represents a 1% aberration. Typically this board shows aberrations of 0.5% within the first 10 ns, and aberrations of 0.25% during the following 10-30 ns.
6-56
SC300 Option
SC300 Hardware Adjustments for the A4 Board
6
Waveform moves as R168 is adjusted
R57
R168
R16
R1
10 ns
Adjusted waveform
Figure 6-16. Adjusting the Wave Peak Center with R168
om039f.eps
R57
R168
R16
R1 om040f.eps
Figure 6-17. Adjusting Base of Peak with R57
6-57
5502A
Service Manual
Ledge on center line
R57
R168
R16
R1
6-58 om041f.eps
Figure 6-18. Adjusting the Ledge with R16
Note
Aberration adjustments are interactive with rise time adjustments.
When you have completed this aberration adjustment, verify the edge rise time to ensure that it remains within tolerance. If it does not, repeat the aberration and rise time adjustments until you achieve the best compromise, within the listed tolerance levels.
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations for Board 5500A-4004
Follow this procedure only if you have Board 5500A-4004 (Fluke PN 937383).
1. Adjust the dc offset on the 11801B so the peak of the square wave is on the center line.
2. Change the time/div on the 11801B to 5 ns/div.
3. Adjust R16 so that the wave crosses the horizontal center line one division before the vertical center.
4. Slowly adjust pot R57 and observe its effect on the first 15 ns of the waveform.
5. Adjust R57 so the rising edge falls back and crosses the horizontal center line one division before the vertical center. The edge should cross the center line at two points, where it rises and falls, and these points should be 20 ns apart. Refer to Figure 6-19.
6. Change the time/div on the 11801B to 2 ns/div.
7. Now adjust pot R1, and observe the ledge that occurs within the first 2 ns of the rising edge. Adjust R1 so this ledge is as flat as possible. Refer to Figure
6-20.
8. Now adjust R57 until this first ledge is on the horizontal center line. When you make this adjustment, the ledge will lose some of its flatness.
9. Return to R1 and flatten the ledge as much as possible. Then return to R57 and try to position the ledge on the center line while keeping it as flat as possible. You want to achieve the best combination of flatness and position.
SC300 Option
SC300 Hardware Adjustments for the A4 Board
6
As you make these adjustments, make sure the peak remains between 4 ns and 6 ns. It is possible to achieve a very flat ledge close to the horizontal center, but if the peak is too high or too low, then the aberrations will not be properly adjusted.
Typically this board shows aberrations of 1%.
Note
Aberration adjustments are interactive with rise time adjustments.
When you have completed this aberration adjustment, verify the edge rise time to ensure that it remains within tolerance. If it does not, repeat the aberration and rise time adjustments until you achieve the best compromise, within the listed tolerance levels.
R57
R168
R16
R1
20 ns
Figure 6-19. Adjusting the Peak Base with R57
Adjust R1 so the first 2ns are as flat as possible.
R57
R168
R16
R1 om042f.eps om043f.eps
Figure 6-20. Adjust the Ledge Flatness with R1
6-59
5502A
Service Manual
Adjusting the Rise Time for the Edge Function
This procedure adjusts the edge rise time, and must be performed after repair.
Both boards use the same procedure to adjust the rise time.
Equipment Setup
Before you start this procedure, program the Calibrator Mainframe to output
250 mV p-p @ 100 kHz. Program the digital storage oscilloscope to the parameters listed below.
Digital Storage Oscilloscope Setup
Vertical Axis: 50 mV/div
Horizontal Axis: 1 ns/div
Adjusting the Edge Rise Time
Only one adjustment needs to be made to the edge rise time. You want a rise time of 950 ps ± 25 ps. To achieve this rise time, adjust C1 until this rise time on the oscilloscope is within this range as shown in Figure 6-21.
Rise time measures between these two points
10%
90%
C1 om044f.eps
Figure 6-21. Adjusting the Edge Rise Time with C1
6-60
Chapter 7
SC600 Calibration Option
Introduction
This chapter contains information and procedures to do the servicing of the
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option.
The calibration and verification procedures supply traceable results for all of the
SC600 functions while they are done with the recommended equipment. All of the necessary equipment, along with the minimum specifications, are shown in
Table 7-1 in the “Equipment Necessary for SC600 Calibration and Verification” section.
The calibration and verification procedures in this chapter are not the ones Fluke uses at the factory. These procedures were made so you can calibrate and verify the SC600 at your own site if necessary. Look at all the procedures before you do them to make sure you have the resources to complete them. It is strongly recommended that, if possible, you send your Calibrator to Fluke for calibration and verification.
Hardware adjustments that are made after repair, at the factory, or designated
Fluke service centers, are supplied in this manual.
Maintenance
There are no maintenance procedures or diagnostic remote commands for the
SC600 that are available to users. If your SC600 is not installed or is not connected to power, the error message in Figure 7-1 shows in the Calibrator display when you push . hvw030i.eps
Figure 7-1. Error Message for Scope Option
If this message shows in the display, and you have the SC600 installed in the
Calibrator, you must send the Calibrator to Fluke for repair. To purchase an
SC600, see your Fluke sales representative.
7-1
5502A
Service Manual
SC600 Specifications
These specifications apply only to the SC600 Option. General specifications for the Calibrator mainframe can be found in Chapter 1. The specifications are correct for these conditions:
• The Calibrator is operated in the conditions specified in Chapter 1.
• The Calibrator has completed a warm-up period that is two times the period the Calibrator was turned off to a maximum of 30 minutes.
• The SC600 has been active more than 5 minutes.
Voltage Function Specifications
Voltage Function
DC Signal
50
Ω Load
1 M
Ω Load
Square Wave Signal
[1]
50
Ω Load
1 M
Ω Load
Amplitude Characteristics
Range
Resolution
Adjustment Range
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ±5 °C
Sequence
Square Wave Frequency Characteristics
Range
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±5 °C
Typical aberration within 4
μs from
50 % of leading/trailing edge
0 to ±6.599 V
Range
1 to 24.999 mV
25 to 109.99 mV
110 mV to 2.1999 V
2.2 to 10.999 V
11 to 130 V
±(0.25 % of output
+ 40 μV)
0 to ±130 V
±1 mV to
±6.599 V p-p
Resolution
1
μV
10 μV
100 μV
1 mV
10 mV
±1 mV to
±130 V p-p
Continuously adjustable
± 0.05 % of output
+ 40 μV)
±(0.25 % of output
+ 40 μV)
1-2-5 (e.g., 10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV)
±(0.1 % of output + 40 μV)
[2]
10 Hz to 10 kHz
±(2.5 ppm of setting)
<(0.5 % of output + 100 μV)
[1] Selectable positive or negative, zero referenced square wave.
[2] For square wave frequencies above 1 kHz,
± (0.25 % of output + 40 μV).
Edge Specifications
Rise Time
Amplitude Range (p-p)
Adjustment Range
Sequence Values
Frequency Range
Typical Jitter, edge to trigger
Leading Edge Aberrations
Typical Duty Cycle
Edge Characteristics into 50
Tunnel Diode Pulse Drive
[2]
Ω Load
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
± 5 °C
(+0 ps / -100 ps) ≤300 ps
[1]
4.5 mV to 2.75 V ±(2 % of output + 200 μV)
±10 % around each sequence value
(indicated below)
5 mV, 10 mV, 25 mV, 50 mV, 60 mV, 80 mV, 100 mV, 200 mV, 250 mV, 300 mV,
500 mV, 600 mV, 1 V, 2.5 V
900 Hz to 11 MHz
<5 ps (p-p) within 2 ns from 50 % of rising edge
2 to 5 ns
5 to 15 ns
±(2.5 ppm of setting)
<(3 % of output + 2 mV)
<(2 % of output + 2 mV)
<(1 % of output + 2 mV) after 15 ns
45 % to 55 %
<(0.5 % of output + 2 mV)
Square wave at 100 Hz to 100 kHz, with variable amplitude of 60 to 100 V p-p.
[1] Above 2 MHz rise time specification <350 ps
[2] All edge aberration measurements made with Tektronix 11801 mainframe with SD26 input module.
7-2
SC600 Calibration Option
SC600 Specifications
7
Leveled Sine Wave Specifications
Leveled Sine Wave
Characteristics into 50
Ω
Frequency Range
50 kHz (reference) 50 kHz to 100 MHz 100 to 300 MHz 300 to 600 MHz
Amplitude Characteristics (for measuring oscilloscope bandwidth)
Range (p-p) 5 mV to 5.5 V
Resolution
Adjustment Range
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty, tcal
±5 °C
Flatness (relative to
50 kHz)
±(2 % of output
+ 300 μV) not applicable
<100 mV: 3 digits
≥100 mV: 4 digits continuously adjustable
±(3.5 % of output
+ 300 μV)
±(1.5 % of output
+ 100
μV)
±(4 % of output
+ 300 μV)
±(2 % of output
+ 100
μV)
±(6 % of output
+ 300 μV)
±(4 % of output
+ 100
μV)
Short-Term Amplitude
Stability
Frequency Characteristics
Resolution
≤ 1 %
[1]
1 kHz 10 kHz
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty, tcal ±5 °C
Distortion Characteristics
2nd Harmonic
±2.5 ppm
[2]
3rd and Higher Harmonics
≤ -33 dBc
≤ -38 dBc
[1] Within 1 hour after reference amplitude setting, provided temperature varies no more than
±5 °C.
[2] With REF CLK set to ext, the frequency uncertainty of the Leveled Sine Wave is the uncertainty of the external 10 MHz clock
±0.3 Hz/gate time.
Time Marker Specifications
Time Maker into 50
Ω
5 s to 50 ms
20 ms to
100 ns
50 to 20 ns 10 ns
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty at Cardinal
Points, tcal
±5 °C
[3]
±(25 + t *1000) ppm
[1]
±2.5 ppm ±2.5 ppm ±2.5 ppm
Wave Shape
Typical Output Level
Typical Jitter (rms)
Sequence spike or square
>1 V p-p
[2] spike, square, or 20 %-pulse
>1 V p-p
[2] spike or square
>1 V p-p
[2]
<10 ppm <1 ppm <1 ppm
5-2-1 from 5 s to 2 ns (e.g., 500 ms, 200 ms, 100 ms)
Adjustment Range
Amplitude Resolution
[1] t is the time in seconds.
[2] Typical rise time of square wave and 20 %-pulse (20 % duty cycle pulse) is < 1.5 ns.
[3] Away from the cardinal points, add ±50 ppm. square or sine
>1 V p-p
<1 ppm
At least
±10 % around each sequence value indicated above.
4 digits
[2]
5 to 2 ns
±2.5 ppm sine
>1 V p-p
<1 ppm
Wave Generator Specifications
Wave Generator Characteristics
Square Wave, Sine Wave, and Triangle Wave into 50
Ω or 1 MΩ
Amplitude
Range into 1 M Ω: into 50
Ω:
1.8 mV to 55 V p-p
1.8 mV to 2.5 V p-p
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ±5 °C,
10 Hz to 10 kHz
±(3 % of p-p output + 100 µV)
Sequence
Typical DC Offset Range
1-2-5 (e.g., 10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV)
0 to
± (≥40 % of p-p amplitude)
[1]
Frequency
Range
Resolution
10 Hz to 100 kHz
4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ±5 °C ±(25 ppm + 15 mHz)
[1] The DC offset plus the wave signal must not exceed 30 V rms.
7-3
5502A
Service Manual
Pulse Generator Specifications
Pulse Generator Characteristics
Typical rise/fall times
Available Amplitudes
Pulse Width
Range
Uncertainty
[2]
Pulse Period
Range
Resolution
Positive pulse into 50
Ω
<2 ns
2.5 V, 1 V, 250 mV, 100 mV, 25 mV, 10 mV
4 ns to 500 ns
[1]
5 % of pulse width ±2 ns
22 ms to 200 ns (45.5 Hz to 5 MHz)
4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency and width
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty at Cardinal Points, tcal ±5 °C ±2.5 ppm
[1] Pulse width not to exceed 40 % of period.
[2] Pulse width uncertainties for periods below 2
μs are not specified.
Trigger Signal Specifications (Pulse Function)
Pulse Period
22 ms to 200 ns
Division Ratio
off/1/10/100
Amplitude into 50
Ω (p-p)
≥1 V
Trigger Signal Specifications (Time Marker Function)
Time Marker Period
2 to 9 ns
10 to 749 ns
750 ns to 34.9 ms
35 ms to 5 s
Division Ratio
off/100 off/10/100 off/1/10/100 off/1
Amplitude into 50
Ω (p-p)
≥1 V
≥1 V
≥1 V
≥1 V
Trigger Signal Specifications (Edge Function)
Edge Signal
Frequency
900 Hz to 11 MHz
Division Ratio
off/1
Typical Amplitude into
50
Ω (p-p)
≥1 V
Typical Rise Time
≤2 ns
Trigger Signal Specifications (Square Wave Voltage Function)
Voltage Function
Frequency
10 Hz to 10 kHz
Division Ratio
off/1
Typical Amplitude into
50
Ω (p-p)
≥1 V
Typical Rise Time
≤2 ns
Trigger Signal Specifications
Trigger Signal Type
Field Formats
Polarity
Amplitude into 50
Ω load
Line Marker
Parameters
Selectable NTSC, SECAM, PAL, PAL-M
Selectable inverted or uninverted video
Adjustable 0 to 1.5 V p-p
Ω, (±7 % accuracy)
Selectable Line Video Marker
Typical Rise Time
≤2 ns
Typical Rise Time
≤2 ns
≤2 ns
≤2 ns
≤2 ns
Typical Lead Time
40 ns
Typical Lead Time
1
μs
Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications
Scope Input Selected
Measurement Range
Uncertainty
50
Ω 1
40 to
60 Ω 500
0.1 % 0.1 %
Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications
Scope Input selected
Measurement Range
Uncertainty
1 M
Ω
5 to 50 pF
±(5 % of input + 0.5 pF)
[1]
[1] Measurement made within 30 minutes of capacitance zero reference. SC600 option must be selected for at least five minutes prior to any capacitance measurement, including the zero process.
7-4
SC600 Calibration Option
Theory of Operation
7
Overload Measurement Specifications
Source Voltage
5 to 9 V
Typical ‘On’ Current
Indication
100 to 180 mA
Typical ‘Off’ Current Indication
10 mA
Maximum Time Limit DC or AC
(1 kHz)
Setable 1 s to 60 s
Theory of Operation
This section contains a brief overview of the SC600 operation modes. This information will let you identify which of the main plug-in PCAs of the Calibrator mainframe are defective. Figure 7-2 shows a block diagram of the SC600 Option
(also referred to as the A50 PCA). Functions that are not shown in the figure are sourced from the DDS Assembly (A6 PCA). See Chapter 2 for a diagram of all
Calibrator mainframe PCA assemblies.
Voltage Mode
All signals for the voltage function come from the A51 Voltage/Video PCA, a daughter card to the A50 PCA. A dc reference voltage is supplied to the A51
PCA from the A6 DDS PCA. All dc and ac oscilloscope output voltages are derived from this signal and sourced on the A51 PCA. The output of the A51
PCA goes to the A50 Signal PCA (also attached to the A50 PCA) and attenuator module and is then cabled to the output connectors on the front panel. The reference dc signal is used to supply + and - dc and ac signals that are amplified or attenuated to supply the range of output signals.
Edge Mode
The DDC A6 PCA is the source of the edge clock and goes to the A50 PCA. The signal is then shaped and divided to supply the fast edge and external trigger signals. The edge signal comes from the A50 PCA first to the attenuator assembly (where range attenuation occurs) and then to the SCOPE connector
BNC on the front panel. If turned on, the trigger is connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel.
Leveled Sine Wave Mode
All of the leveled sine wave signals (from 50 kHz to 600 MHz) are supplied from the A50 PCA. The leveled sine wave signal comes from the A50 PCA to the onboard attenuator assembly. The attenuator assembly supplies range attenuation and also contains a power detector which keeps amplitude flatness across the frequency range. The signal is then applied to the SCOPE connector on the front panel.
Time Marker Mode
There are three primary “ranges” of time marker operation: 5 s to 20 ms, 10 ms to 2 μs, and 1 μs to 2 ns.
The A6 DDS PCA is the source of the 5 s to 20 ms markers and are sent to the
A50 PCA. The signal path is also divided to supply the external trigger circuitry on the A50 PCA. If turned on, the trigger is connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel. The marker signal that goes through the A50 PCA is connected to the attenuator assembly. The signal is then applied to the SCOPE connector on the front panel.
The 10 ms to 2
μs markers are derived from a square wave signal that comes from the A6 PCA and is applied to the A50 PCA for wave shaping and external trigger generation. If the trigger is turned on, the signal is connected to the Trig
Out BNC on the front panel. The marker signal on the A50 PCA goes to the attenuator assembly and then to the SCOPE connector on the front panel.
The leveled sine wave generator on the A50 PCA is the source of the 1
μs to
2 ns markers. This signal is also divided to drive the external trigger circuits. If
7-5
5502A
Service Manual
the trigger is turned on, the signal is then connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel. The other path sends the signal to the marker circuits on the A50
PCA, where the signal is shaped into the other marker waveforms. The marker signals on the A50 PCA go to the attenuator assembly and then to the SCOPE connector on the front panel.
Wave Generator Mode
All signals for the wavegen function come from the A6 PCA and go to the A50
PCA. They then go to the attenuator assembly, where range attenuation occurs.
Wavegen signals are then sent to the SCOPE connector on the front panel.
Video and pulse generator mode signals are derived from dedicated circuitry on the A50 SC600 option PCA. If there are faults related only to these functions, then the A50 PCA is most likely defective.
Input Impedance Mode (Resistance)
The reference resistors for this mode are on the A50 PCA, while the DCV reference signal and measurement signals are on the A6 DDS PCA.
Input Impedance Mode (Capacitance)
The A50 SC600 Scope Option PCA contains the capacitance measurement circuits, that uses signals from the leveled sine wave source. If there are faults related only to capacitance measurement, then the A50 PCA is most likely defective.
Overload Mode
The A51 Voltage/Video PCA of the A50 SC600 Option PCA supplies the voltage for the overload mode. The voltage is applied to the external 50
Ω load, and the circuit current is monitored by the A6 DDS PCA.
7-6
SC600 Calibration Option
Theory of Operation
7
LF PWB
A6
DDS
50 Ω
Time Mark II
Analog Shaped
2 ms - 10 ms
Time Mark III
Pulse Shaped
20 ms - 1 ms
LF Mux.
Trigger
%1,10,100,1000
Oscilloscope
Calibrator
Trigger BNC
External
Clock In
Leveled Sine Wave and Time Mark IV
Unleveled
Leveled
PLLs
Pwr Amp.
Leveling Loop
Level
Edge
10 MHz Clock
HF Mux.
HF PWB
Step Attenuator Module
HF Mux.
SCOPE
Output BNC pp detect
A4 SC600 Option
Figure 7-2. SC600 Block Diagram
om031f.eps
7-7
5502A
Service Manual
Equipment Necessary for SC600 Calibration and Verification
Table 7-1 is a list of equipment necessary for calibration and verification of the
SC600 Oscilloscope Option.
Table 7-1. SC600 Calibration and Verification Equipment
Wave Generator and Edge Amplitude Calibration, AC Voltage and TD Pulser Equipment
Instrument Model Minimum Use Specifications
Digital Multimeter HP 3458A Voltage
Edge
1.8 mV to
±130 V p-p
Uncertainty:0.06 %
4.5 mV to 2.75 V p-p
Uncertainty:0.06 %
Termination
Output Cable
Calibration and ac voltage verification)
(supplied with SC600) Type N to BNC
Edge Rise Time and Aberrations Verification
High-Frequency Digital
Storage Oscilloscope
Tektronix 11801 with
Tektronix SD-22/26 sampling head, or
Tektronix TDS 820 with
8 GHz bandwidth
Resolution
Attenuator Weinschel 9-10 (SMA) or Weinschel 18W-10 or equivalent
10 dB, 3.5 mm (m/f)
Adapter
Output Cable (supplied with SC600)
BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m)
Type N to BNC
4.5 mV to 2.75 V
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration and Verification
AC Measurement
Standard
Fluke 5790A Range 5 mV p-p to 5.5 V p-p
Adapter Pomona #1269
Termination
BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug
Output Cable (supplied with SC600) Type N to BNC
DC and AC Voltage Calibration and Verification, DC Voltage Verification
Digital Multimeter
Adapter
HP 3458A
Pomona #1269
Termination
BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug
Output Cable (supplied with SC600) Type N to BNC
7-8
SC600 Calibration Option
Equipment Necessary for SC600 Calibration and Verification
7
Table 7-1. SC600 Calibration and Verification Equipment (cont.)
Wave Generator and Edge Amplitude Calibration, AC Voltage and TD Pulser Equipment
Instrument Model Minimum Use Specifications
Pulse Width Calibration and Verification
High-Frequency Digital
Storage Oscilloscope
Tektronix 11801 with
Tektronix SD-22/26 sampling head
Attenuator
Adapter (2)
Output Cable (supplied with SC600)
3 dB, 3.5 mm (m/f)
BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m)
Type N to BNC
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification
Frequency Counter
Adapter
Output Cable
PM 6680 with option
(PM 9621, PM 9624, or
PM 9625) and (PM
9690 or PM 9691)
50 kHz to 600 MHz, <0.15 ppm uncertainty
Pomona #3288 BNC(f) to Type N(m) Adapter
Output Cable (supplied with SC600) Type N to BNC
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness (Low Frequency) Calibration and Verification
AC Measurement
Standard
Fluke 5790A with -03 option
Range
Frequency
Pomona #3288 BNC(f) to Type N(m)
(supplied with SC600) Type N to BNC
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification
5 mV p-p to 5.5 V p-p
50 kHz to 10 MHz
Spectrum Analyzer
Adapter
Output Cable
HO 8509A
Pomona #3288 BNC(f) to Type N(m)
(supplied with SC600) Type N to BNC
Pulse Period, Edge Frequency, AC Voltage Frequency Verification
Frequency Counter
Output Cable
PM 6680 with option
(PM 9690 or PM 9691)
20 ms to 150 ns, 10 Hz to 10 MHz: <0.15 ppm uncertainty
(supplied with SC600) Type N to BNC
Frequency Counter
Output Cable
Edge Duty Cycle
PM 6680
(supplied with SC600) Type N to BNC
7-9
5502A
Service Manual
Table 7-1. SC600 Calibration and Verification Equipment (cont.)
Wave Generator and Edge Amplitude Calibration, AC Voltage and TD Pulser Equipment
Instrument Model Minimum Use Specifications
Overload Functional Verification
Termination
Output Cable (supplied with SC600) Type N to BNC
MeasZ Resistance, Capacitance Verification
Resistors
Capacitors
Adapters
Output Cable
50 pF nominal value at the end of BNC(f) connector
To connect resistors and capacitors to BNC(f) connector
(supplied with SC600) Type N to BNC
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness (High Frequency) Calibration and Verification
Instrument Model Minimum Use Specifications
Power Meter
Power Sensor
Power Sensor
Hewlett-Packard 437B Range
Frequency
Hewlett-Packard 8482A Range
Frequency
Hewlett-Packard 8481D Range
-42 dBm to +5.6 dBm
10 MHz to 600 MHz
-20 dBm to +19 dBm
10 MHz to 600 MHz
-42 dBm to -20 dBm
Frequency 10 MHz to 600 MHz
30 dB Reference
Attenuatior
Hewlett-Packard
11708A (supplied with
HP 8481D)
Output Cable
Frequency Counter
Adapter
Output Cable
PN 1250-1474
(supplied with SC600) Type N to BNC
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency, Time Marker Verification
PM 6680 with option
(PM 9621, PM 9624, or
PM 9625) and (PM
9690 or PM 9691)
2 ns to 5 s, 50 kHz to 600 MHz: <0.15 ppm uncertainty
Pomona #3288 BNC(f) to Type N(m)
(supplied with SC600) Type N to BNC
7-10
SC600 Calibration Option
Calibration Setup
7
Table 7-1. SC600 Calibration and Verification Equipment (cont.)
Wave Generator and Edge Amplitude Calibration, AC Voltage and TD Pulser Equipment
Instrument Model Minimum Use Specifications
Wave Generator Verification
AC Measurement
Standard
Fluke 5790A with -03 option
Range
Frequency
1.8 mV p-p to 55 V p-p
10 Hz to 100 kHz
BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug Adapter Pomona #1269
Termination
Output Cable (supplied with SC600) Type N to BNC
Calibration Setup
The procedures in this manual were made to let users calibrate the SC600 at their own site if it becomes necessary to do so. It is strongly recommended that, if possible, you send your Calibrator to Fluke for calibration and verification. The
Calibrator Mainframe must be fully calibrated before you do calibration of the
SC600.
The hardware adjustments are intended to be one-time adjustments done in the factory. Adjustment can be necessary after repair. Hardware adjustments must be done before calibration. Calibration must be done after if hardware adjustments are made. See the “Hardware Adjustments” section in this chapter.
The AC Voltage function is dependent on the DC Voltage function. Calibration of the AC Voltage function is necessary after the DC Voltage is calibrated.
The Calibrator Mainframe must complete a warm-up period and the SC600 must be turned on for a minimum of 5 minutes before you start calibration. This lets internal components become thermally stable. The Calibrator Mainframe warmup period is a minimum of two times the period the calibrator was turned off, or a maximum of 30 minutes. Push to turn on the SC600. The green LED on the
SCOPE key is illuminated when the SC600 is turned on.
Most of the SC600 Option can be calibrated from the front panel. Push to turn on the SC600 and wait a minimum of 5 minutes. To start the Scope Cal mode:
1. Push .
2. Push the CAL softkey.
3. Push the CAL softkey again.
4. Push the SCOPE CAL softkey.
Note
If you push the Scope Cal softkey sooner than 5 minutes after you
pushed ,, a warning message shows in the display.
All equipment used to calibrate the SC600 must be calibrated, certified traceable if traceability is to be kept, and operated in their specified operation environment.
It is also important to make sure that the equipment has had sufficient time to warm up before you start calibration. Refer to the operation manual for each piece of equipment for more information.
7-11
5502A
Service Manual
Before you start calibration, look at all of the procedures to make sure you have the resources to do them.
The Calibrator starts calibration with the DC Voltage function. If it is necessary to start with a different function, push the OPTIONS softkey. Then push the NEXT
SECTION softkey until you see the function name in the display.
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage
Functions
The Voltage, Edge, and Wave Generator functions have square wave voltages that must be calibrated or verified. The HP3458A digital multimeter can be programmed from the front panel or through the remote interface to make these measurements.
Overview of HP3458A Operation
The Hewlett-Packard 3458A digital multimeter is configured as a digitizer to measure the peak-to-peak value of the signal. It is set to DCV, with different analog-to-digital integration times and trigger commands to measure the topline and baseline of the square wave signal.
Voltage Square Wave Measurement Setup
To make accurate and repeatable measurements of the topline and baseline of a voltage square wave with a maximum frequency of 10 kHz, set the integration and sample time of the HP3458A. For this measurement, connect the external trigger of the HP3458A to the external trigger output of the SC600. Set the
HP3458A to make an analog-to-digital conversion after it senses the falling edge of an external trigger.
The conversion does not occur until after the delay set by the 3458A “DELAY” command. The frequency measured by the DMM influences the actual integration time. Table 7-2 summarizes the DMM settings necessary to make topline and baseline measurements. Figure 7-3 illustrates the correct connections for this setup.
Table 7-2. Voltage HP3458A Settings
Voltage Input
Frequency
100 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
0.1
0.01
0.002
0.001
NPLC
HP3458A Settings
DELAY (topline)
0.007 s
0.0007 s
0.00014
0.00007
DELAY (baseline)
0.012 s
0.0012 s
0.00024
0.00012
For all measurements, the HP 3458A is in DCV, manual range, with external trigger turned on. A convenient method to make these measurements from the front panel of the HP3458A is to put these parameters into some of the userdefined keys. For example, to make topline measurements at 1 kHz, you set the
DMM to “NPLC .01; DELAY .0007; TRIG EXT”. To find the average of multiple measurements, you can set one of the keys to “MATH OFF; MATH STAT” and then use the “RMATH MEAN” function to recall the average or mean value.
7-12
SC600 Calibration Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions
7
Note
For this application, if you make measurements of a signal >1 kHz, the HP 3458A can show 0.05 % to 0.1 % peaking in the 100 mV range. For these signals, lock the HP 3458A to the 1 V range.
HP 3458A (Front)
SC600 Cable
5502A
5502A CALIBRATOR
50 Ω Feedthrough
Termination
BNC(F) to
Double Banana
Adapter
HP 3458A (Rear)
hvw105.eps
Figure 7-3. Equipment Setup for SC600 Voltage Square Wave Measurements
Edge and Wave Gen Square Wave Measurements Setup
The setup to measure the topline and baseline of Edge and Wave Generator signals is a little different from the Voltage Square Wave method given above.
The HP 3458A is triggered by a change in input level rather than an external trigger. The trigger level is set to 1 % of the DCV range, with ac coupling of the trigger signal. The delay after the trigger event is also changed for the Edge and
Wave Generator functions. See Table 7-3 and Figure 7-4.
Voltage Input
Frequency
1 kHz
10 kHz
Table 7-3. Edge and Wave Generator HP 3458A Settings
.01
.001
NPLC
HP3458A Settings
DELAY (topline)
.0002 s
.00002 s
DELAY (baseline)
.0007 s
.00007 s
7-13
5502A
Service Manual
HP 3458A
SC600 Cable
5502A
5502A CALIBRATOR
50 Ω Feedthrough
Termination
BNC(F) to
Double Banana
Adapter
7-14 hvw106.eps
Figure 7-4. Equipment Setup for SC600 Edge and Wave Gen Square Wave Measurements
For all measurements, the HP 3458A is in DCV, manual range, with level triggering enabled. A convenient method to make these measurements from the front panel of the HP 3458A is to put these parameters into some of the userdefined keys. For example, to make topline measurements at 1 kHz, you set the
DMM to “NPLC .01; LEVEL 1; DELAY .0002; TRIG LEVEL”. To find the average of multiple measurements, you can set one of the keys to “MATH OFF; MATH
STAT” and then use the “RMATH MEAN” function to recall the average or mean value. Refer to Figure 7-4 for the correct connections
DC Voltage Calibration
This procedure uses:
• Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
• BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
Note
AC voltage calibration is necessary for dc voltage calibration.
See Figure 7-4 for the correct equipment connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe in Scope Cal mode, DC Voltage section. To calibrate DC Voltage:
1. Connect the SCOPE connector of the Calibrator to the HP 3458A input, with the output cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, Auto Range, NPLC = 10, FIXEDZ = on.
3. Push the GO ON softkey.
4. Make sure the HP 3458A measurement is 0.0 V DC
±10 μV. If not, adjust
R121 on A41. R121 is a square one turn pot and has a mark on the PCA near Q29.
5. Push the GO ON softkey.
6. Calibration voltages 33 V and higher automatically put the Calibrator output in standby. When this occurs, push on the Calibrator to output the signal.
SC600 Calibration Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions
7
Let the HP 3458A DC voltage measurement become stable. Type in the measurement through the Calibrator keypad and then push .
Note
The Calibrator will show a message if the typed in value is higher or lower than the limits of the value. If this occurs, examine the setup and carefully re-type in the measurement with the correct multiplier
(i.e., m,
μ
, n, p). If the warning continues, repair may be necessary.
7. Do step 6 again until the Calibrator shows that the subsequent steps calibrate ac voltage. Push the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
AC voltage must be calibrated: continue with the subsequent section.
AC Voltage Calibration
This procedure uses the same equipment and setup as DC Voltage calibration.
Refer to Figure 7-4. DC voltages are measured and typed in to the Calibrator to calibrate the AC Voltage function.
To calibrate the Calibrator for ac voltage:
1. Push the OPTIONS softkey.
2. Push the NEXT SECTION softkey until “The next steps calibrate -SC600
ACV” shows in the display.
3. Push the GO ON softkey.
4. Let the HP 3485A voltage measurement become stable.
5. Type in the measurement through the keypad of the Calibrator.
6. Push .
Note
The Calibrator will show a message if the typed in value is higher or lower than the limits of the value. If this occurs, examine the setup and carefully re-type in the measurement with the correct multiplier
(i.e., m,
μ
, n, p). If the warning continues, repair may be necessary.
7. Do step 4 again until the Calibrator shows that the subsequent steps calibrate
WAVGEN. Push the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
Wave Generator Calibration
This procedure uses:
• Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
• BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
To calibrate the wave generator:
1. Push the OPTIONS softkey.
2. Push the NEXT SECTION softkey until “WAVEGEN Cal:” shows in the display.
3. Connect the SCOPE connector of the Calibrator to the HP3458A input with the output cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
7-15
5502A
Service Manual
4. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL.
5. Set the HP 3458A DELAY to .0002 for the top part of the waveform (i.e. topline) measurement, and .0007 for the lower part of the waveform (i.e. baseline). Manually range lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the topline measurements. Use this same range for the related baseline measurements at each step.
6. For each calibration step, get samples for 2 seconds minimum, with the HP
3458A MATH functions to retrieve the average or mean value. See the
“Setup for SC600 Edge and Wave Generator Measurements” section for more information.
Edge Amplitude Calibration
This procedure uses:
• Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
• BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
To do Edge Amplitude Calibration:
1. Setup the equipment as shown in Figure 7-4.
2. Push the OPTIONS softkey.
3. Push the NEXT SECTION softkey until “Set up to measure fast edge amplitude” shows in the display.
4. Connect the SCOPE connector of the Calibrator to the HP 3458A input with the output cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
5. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL.
6. Set the HP 3458A DELAY to .0002 for the top part of the waveform (or topline) measurement, and .0007 for the lower part of the waveform (or baseline). Manually range lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the baseline measurements. Use this same range for the related baseline measurements at each step.
Note
For the edge function, the topline is near 0 V and the baseline is a negative voltage.
7. For each calibration step, get samples for 2 seconds minimum, with the HP
3458A MATH functions to retrieve the average or mean value. See the
“Setup for SC600 Edge and Wave Generator Measurements” section for more information.
The “true amplitude” of the waveform is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements, after a load resistance error correction. To make this correction, multiply the measurement by (0.5 * (50 + Rload)/Rload), where Rload
= actual feedthrough termination resistance.
7-16
SC600 Calibration Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions
7
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration
This procedure uses:
• 5790A AC Measurement Standard
• BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
To do a leveled sine wave amplitude calibration:
1. Push the OPTIONS softkey.
2. Push the NEXT SECTION softkey until “Set up to measure fast edge amplitude” shows in the display.
3. Connect the output cable to the 50
Ω feedthrough termination.
4. Connect the other end of the output cable to the SCOPE connector of the
Calibrator.
5. Connect the 50
Ω feedthrough termination at the other end of the cable to input 2 of the 5790A with the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
6. Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and
Hi Res on.
7. Push the GO ON softkey on the Calibrator.
8. Push to turn on the Calibrator output.
9. Let the 5790A rms measurement become stable.
10. Multiply the 5790A measurement by (0.5 * (50 + Rload)/Rload), where Rload
= the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Type in the corrected rms measurement through the keypad of the
Calibrator.
11. Push .
Note
The Calibrator will show a message if the typed in value is higher or lower than the limits of the value. If this occurs, examine the setup and carefully re-type in the measurement with the correct multiplier
(i.e., m,
μ
, n, p). If the warning continues, repair may be necessary.
12. Do step 10 and 11 again until the Calibrator shows that the subsequent steps calibrate Leveled Sine flatness. Push the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
7-17
5502A
Service Manual
5590A
5790A
AC MEASUREMENT
STANDARD
5502A
5502A CALIBRATOR
INPUT 1
1000V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
SHUNT
3V RMS MAX
INPUT 2
1000V RMS MAX
HI
LO
WIDEBAND
7V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
10V PEAK
MAX
10V PK
MAX
GROUND GUARD
Figure 7-5. Calibrator to 5790A AC Measurement Standard Connections
hvw103.eps
7-18
SC600 Calibration Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions
7
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Calibration
Leveled Sine Wave flatness calibration is divided into two frequency bands:
50 kHz to 10 MHz (low frequency) and >10 MHz to 600 MHz (high frequency).
The equipment setups are different for each band. Flatness calibration of the low frequency band is made relative to 50 kHz. Flatness calibration of the high frequency band is made relative to 10 MHz.
Leveled Sine Wave flatness is calibrated at multiple amplitudes. The low and high frequency bands are calibrated at each amplitude. Calibration starts with the low frequency band, then the high frequency band for the first amplitude, followed by the low frequency band, then the high frequency band for the second amplitude, and so on, until the flatness calibration is complete.
Push the OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION softkeys until “Set up to measure leveled sine flatness” shows in the display.
Low Frequency Calibration
To do the low frequency calibration:
1. Connect the SCOPE connector of the Calibrator to the wideband input of the
5790A. See the “Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness” section for more information.
2. Push the GO ON softkey.
3. Find the 50 kHZ reference.
• Let the 5790A measurement become stable.
• Push the 5790A Set Ref softkey.
4. Push the 5790A Clear Ref softkey to clear the reference if necessary.
5. Push the GO ON softkey.
6. Adjust the amplitude with the front panel knob of the Calibrator until the
5790A reference deviation equals the 50 kHz reference
±1000 ppm.
7. Do steps 2 through 6 again until Calibrator shows that the reference frequency is 10 MHz.
Continue with the high frequency calibration.
High Frequency Calibration
To do the high frequency calibration:
1. Connect the SCOPE connector of the Calibrator to the power meter and power sensor. See the “Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness” section for more information.
2. Push the GO ON softkey.
3. Find the 10 MHZ reference.
• Push the power meter SHIFT Key, then FREQ key and use the arrow keys to type in the cal factor of the power sensor. Make sure the factor is correct, then push the ENTER key on the power meter.
• Let the power meter measurement become stable.
• Push the power meter REL key.
4. Push the GO ON softkey.
5. Push the power meter SHIFT key, then FREQ key, and use the arrow keys to
7-19
5502A
Service Manual
set the Cal Factor of the power sensor for the frequency shown in the
Calibrator display. Make sure that the factor is correct, then push the power meter ENTER key.
6. Adjust the amplitude with the front panel knob of the Calibrator until the power sensor is equal to the 10 MHz reference
±0.1 %.
7. Do steps 1 through 5 again until the Calibrator display shows that the reference frequency is now 50 kHz or that the subsequent step is calibrate pulse width.
Do the low frequency calibration procedure for the subsequent amplitude unless the Calibrator Mainframe display shows that the subsequent steps calibrate pulse width. Push the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
Pulse Width Calibration
This procedure uses:
• High Frequency Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO): Tektronix 11801 with
Tektronix SD-22/26 sampling head
• 3 dB attenuator, 3.5 mm (m/f)
• BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter (2)
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
• Second BNC cable
To do a pulse width calibration:
1. Push the OPTIONS softkey.
2. Push the NEXT SECTION softkey until “Set up to measure pulse width” shows in the display.
3. Connect the output cable to the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator. Connect the other end of the output cable to one of the BNC(f) to 3.5 mm (m) adapter and then to the sampling head of the DSO through the 3 dB attenuator.
4. Use the second BNC cable with the BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter attached to connect the TRIG OUT of the Calibrator to the trigger input of the DSO.
5. Set the DSO to:
• Main Time Base:
• Vertical scale:
• Trigger:
40 ns
200 mV/div, +900 mV offset source = ext, level = 0.5 V, ext. atten. = x10, slope = +, mode = auto
• Measurement function: positive width
6. Push the GO ON softkey.
7. Adjust the DSO horizontal scale and main time base position until the pulse signal spans between half and full display. If no pulse is output, increase the pulse width with the front-panel knob of the Calibrator until a pulse is output.
8. If instructed to adjust the pulse width by the Calibrator display, adjust the pulse width to as near 4 ns as possible with the front-panel knob of the
Calibrator.
9. Push the GO ON softkey.
7-20
SC600 Calibration Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions
7
10. Let the DSO width measurement become stable.
11. Type in the measurement through the keypad of the Calibrator.
12. Push .
Note
The Calibrator shows a message if the typed in value is higher or lower than the limits of the value. If this occurs, examine the setup and carefully re-type in the measurement with the correct multiplier
(m,
μ
, n, p). If the warning continues, type in a value between the pulse width shown in the display and the last typed in value.
Continue to do this with a value that is nearer to the pulse width in the display until the value is accepted. After you complete the pulse width calibration you must re do the calibration until all typed in values are accepted the first time without the message.
13. Do steps 7 through 12 again until the Calibrator instructs you to connect a resistor.
14. Push the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
MeasZ Calibration
The MeasZ function is calibrated with resistors and a capacitor of known values.
The actual resistance and capacitance values are typed in while they are measured by the Calibrator.
The resistors and capacitor must make a solid connection to a BNC(f) to make a connection to the end of the output cable supplied with the SC600. The resistance and capacitance values must be known at this BNC(f) connector. An
HP 3458A DMM is used to make a 4-wire ohms measurement at the BNC(f) connector to find the actual resistance values. An HP 4192A Impedance
Analyzer at 10 MHz is used to find the actual capacitance value.
This procedure uses:
• Resistors of known values: 1 MΩ and 50 Ω nominal
• Adapters to connect resistors to the BNC(f) connector
• Adapters and capacitor to get 50 pF nominal value at the end of the BNC(f) connector
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
To do a MeasZ calibration:
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 7-6.
7-21
5502A
Service Manual
BNC(F)
SC600
Cable
5502A
5502A CALIBRATOR
7-22 hvw107.eps
Figure 7-6. MeasZ Calibration Connections
2. Push the OPTIONS softkey.
3. Push the NEXT SECTION softkey until “connect a 50
Ω resistor” shows in the display.
4. Connect the output cable to the SCOPE connector of the Calibrator.
5. Connect the other end of the output cable to BNC(f) connector attached to the 50
Ω resistor.
6. Push the GO ON softkey.
7. Type in the 50
Ω resistance.
Note
The Calibrator will show a message if the typed in value is higher or lower than the limits of the value. If this occurs, examine the setup and carefully re-type in the measurement with the correct multiplier
(m,
μ
, n, p). If the warning continues, repair may be necessary.
8. When instructed by the Calibrator, disconnect the 50
Ω resistance and connect the 1 M
Ω resistance to the end of the output cable.
9. Push the GO ON softkey.
10. Type in the actual 1 M
Ω resistance.
11. When instructed for the first reference capacitor by the Calibrator, disconnect the 1 M
Ω resistance and leave nothing attached to the end of the output cable.
12. Push the GO ON softkey.
13. Enter 0.
14. When prompted for the second reference capacitor by the Calibrator, connect the 50 pF capacitance to the end of the output cable.
SC600 Calibration Option
Verification
7
15. Push the GO ON blue softkey.
16. Type in the actual 50 pF capacitance.
17. When the Calibrator shows calibration is complete in the display, push the
OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
Verification
Do a verification of all Oscilloscope Calibration functions a minimum of one time each year, or when the SC600 is calibrated. The verification procedures in this section supply traceable results. The factory uses different procedures and instruments of higher precision than those shown in this manual. The procedures in this manual let you verify the SC600 at your site if necessary. Fluke recommends you send the Calibrator to Fluke for calibration and verification.
All equipment used to do a verification on the SC600 must be calibrated, certified traceable if traceability is to be kept, and operated in their specified operation environment.
It is also important to make sure that the equipment has had sufficient time to warm up before you start verification. Refer to the operation manual for each piece of equipment for more information.
Before you start verification, look at all of the procedures to make sure you have the resources to do them.
Table 7-4 is a list of the SC600 functions and verification methods.
Table 7-4. Verification Methods for SC600 Functions
DC Voltage
AC Voltage amplitude
AC Voltage frequency
Procedure supplied in this manual.
Procedure supplied in this manual.
Procedure supplied in this manual.
Edge amplitude Procedure supplied in this manual.
Edge frequency, duty cycle, rise time Procedure supplied in this manual.
Tunnel Diode Pulser amplitude Procedure supplied in this manual. See the “Voltage and Edge
Calibration and Verification” section for more information.
Procedure supplied in this manual. Leveled sine wave amplitude, frequency, harmonics, and flatness
Time marker period
Wave generator amplitude
Procedure supplied in this manual.
Procedure supplied in this manual.
Pulse width, period
MeasZ resistance, capacitance
Overload functionality
Procedure supplied in this manual.
Procedure supplied in this manual.
Procedure supplied in this manual.
7-23
5502A
Service Manual
DC Voltage Verification
This procedure uses:
• Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
• BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
For dc voltage verification, see Figure 7-4 for equipment connections.
Set the Calibrator to SCOPE mode, with the Volt menu shown in the display.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
To do a 1 M
Ω verification:
1. Connect the SCOPE connector of the Calibrator to the HP 3458A input, with the cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2. Make sure the Calibrator is set to 1 M
Ω (The Output @ softkey toggles the impedance between 50
Ω and 1 MΩ).
3. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, Auto Range, NPLC = 10, FIXEDZ = on.
4. Set the Calibrator output to the voltage in Table 7-5.
5. Push on the Calibrator.
6. Let the HP 3458A measurement become stable.
7. Record the HP 3458A measurement for each voltage in Table 7-5.
8. Compare the result to the tolerance column.
Verification at 50
Ω
To do a 50
Ω verification:
1. Connect the SCOPE connector of the Calibrator to the HP 3458A input, with the cable and the 50
Ω termination connected to the BNC(f) to Double
Banana adapter.
2. Make sure the Calibrator impedance is set to 50
Ω (The Output @ softkey toggles the impedance between 50
Ω and 1 MΩ).
3. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, Auto Range, NPLC = 10, FIXEDZ = on.
4. Set the Calibrator output to the voltage in Table 7-6.
5. Push on the Calibrator.
6. Let the HP 3458A measurement become stable.
7. Record the HP 3458A measurement for each voltage in Table 7-6.
8. Compare the result to the tolerance column.
7-24
SC600 Calibration Option
Verification
7
67.5 mV
-67.5 mV
109.9 mV
-109.9 mV
110 mV
-110 mV
305 mV
-305 mV
499 mV
-499 mV
0.50 V
-0.50 V
1.35 V
Calibrator Output
0 mV
1.25 mV
-1.25 mV
10.0 mV
-10.0 mV
17.5 mV
-17.5 mV
24.9 mV
-24.9 mV
25.0 mV
-25.0 mV
2.49 mV
-2.49 mV
2.5 mV
-2.5 mV
6.25 mV
-6.25 mV
9.90 mV
-9.90 mV
Table 7-5. DC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
HP3458A Measurement (V dc)
0.000045 V
0.000045 V
4.875E-05 V
4.875E-05 V
5.245E-05 V
5.245E-05 V
0.0000525 V
0.0000525 V
7.375E-05 V
7.375E-05 V
9.495E-05 V
9.495E-05 V
0.000095 V
0.000095 V
0.0001925 V
0.0001925 V
0.0002895 V
0.0002895 V
0.00029 V
0.00029 V
0.000715 V
Tolerance
±(V dc)
0.00004 V
4.063E-05 V
4.063E-05 V
4.125E-05 V
4.125E-05 V
4.125E-05 V
4.125E-05 V
4.313E-05 V
4.313E-05 V
4.495E-05 V
4.495E-05 V
7-25
5502A
Service Manual
Calibrator Output
0 mV
2.49 mV
-2.49 mV
9.90 mV
-9.90 mV
24.9 mV
-24.9 mV
109.9 mV
-109.9 mV
499 mV
-499 mV
2.19 V
-2.19 V
6.599 V
-6.599 V
Calibrator Output
-1.35 V
2.19 V
-2.19 V
Table 7-5. DC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω (cont.)
HP3458A Measurement (V dc) Tolerance
±(V dc)
0.000715 V
0.001135 V
0.001135 V
2.20 V
-2.20 V
6.60 V
-6.60 V
10.99 V
-10.99 V
11.0 V
-11.0 V
70.5 V
-70.5 V
130.0 V
-130.0 V
0.00114 V
0.00114 V
0.00334 V
0.00334 V
0.005535 V
0.005535 V
0.00554 V
0.00554 V
0.03529 V
0.03529 V
0.06504 V
0.06504 V
Table 7-6. DC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
HP3458A Measurement
(V dc)
Tolerance (V dc min.)
-0.040 mV
2.4438 mV
-2.5362 mV
9.835 mV
-9.965 mV
24.798 mV
-25.002 mV
109.585 mV
-110.215 mV
497.71 mV
-500.29 mV
2.1845 V
-2.1955 V
6.5825 V
-6.6155 V
Tolerance (V dc max.)
0.040 mV
2.5362 mV
-2.4438 mV
9.965 mV
-9.835 mV
25.002 mV
-24.798 mV
110.215 mV
-109.585 mV
500.29 mV
-497.71 mV
2.1955 V
-2.1845 V
6.6155 V
-6.5825 V
7-26
SC600 Calibration Option
Verification
7
AC Voltage Amplitude Verification
This procedure uses:
• Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
• BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
• Second BNC cable
For ac voltage verification, see Figure 7-3 for equipment connections.
Set the Calibrator to SCOPE mode, with the Volt menu shown in the display.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
To do a 1 M
Ω verification:
1. Connect the SCOPE connector of the Calibrator to the HP 3458A input, with the cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2. Connect the TRIG OUT connector of the Calibrator to the EXT Trig connector on the rear panel of the HP3458A.
3. Make sure the Calibrator is set to 1 M
Ω (The Output @ softkey toggles the impedance between 50
Ω and 1 MΩ).
4. For ac voltage output at 1 kHz, set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01, TRIG
EXT.
5. Set the HP 3458A DELAY to .0007 for the top part of the waveform (or topline) measurement, and .0012 for the lower part of the waveform (or baseline). Manually range lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the topline measurements. Use this same range for the related baseline measurements at each step.
6. Push the TRIG softkey on the Calibrator until /1 shows in the display.
7. Measure the topline first as shown in Table 7-7. For each measurement, get samples for 2 seconds minimum, with the HP 3458A MATH functions to retrieve the average or mean value. See the “Setup for SC600 Edge and
Wave Generator Measurements” section for more information.
8. Measure the baseline of each output after the topline measurement, as shown in Table 7-7. The peak-to-peak value is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements. Compare the result to the tolerance column.
9. When you make measurements at the other frequencies, set up the HP
3458A (NPLC and topline and baseline DELAY) as shown in Table 7-2. (See the “Setup for SC600 Voltage Square Wave Measurements” section.)
7-27
5502A
Service Manual
Table 7-7. AC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
Calibrator
Output (1 kHz, or as noted)
1 mV
-1 mV
10 mV
-10 mV
25 mV
-25 mV
110 mV
-110 mV
500 mV
-500 mV
2.2 V
-2.2 V
11 V
-11 V
130 V
-130 V
200 mV, 100 Hz
200 mV, 1 kHz
200 mV, 5 kHz
200 mV, 10 kHz
2.2 V, 100 Hz
2.2 V, 5 kHz
2.2 V, 10 kHz
HP3458A
Range
10 V dc
10 V dc
10 V dc
1000 V dc
1000 V dc
1 V dc
1 V dc
1 V dc
1 V dc
10 V dc
10 V dc
10 V dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
1 V dc
1 V dc
10 V dc
Topline
Measurement
Baseline
Measurement
Peak-to-Peak
Tolerance
(
±V)
0.00224
0.01104
0.01104
0.13004
0.13004
0.00024
0.00024
0.00054
0.00054
0.00224
0.00554
0.00554
0.000041
0.000041
0.00005
0.00005
0.000065
0.000065
0.00015
0.00015
0.00054
0.00054
0.00224
7-28
SC600 Calibration Option
Verification
7
Verification at 50
Ω
To do a 50 Ω verification:
1. Connect the SCOPE connector of the Calibrator to the HP 3458A input, with the cable and the 50 Ω termination connected to the BNC(f) to Double
Banana adapter.
2. Connect the TRIG OUT connector of the Calibrator to the EXT Trig connector on the rear panel of the HP3458A.
3. Make sure the Calibrator impedance is set to 50 Ω (The Output @ softkey toggles the impedance between 50 Ω and 1 MΩ).
4. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01, TRIG EXT.
5. Set the HP 3458A DELAY to .0007 for the top part of the waveform (topline) measurement, and .0012 for the lower part of the waveform (baseline).
Manually range lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the topline measurements. Use this same range for the related baseline measurements at each step. See Table 7-8.
6. Push the TRIG softkey on the Calibrator until /1 shows in the display.
7. Measure the topline first as shown in Table 7-8. For each measurement, get samples for 2 seconds minimum, with the HP 3458A MATH functions to retrieve the average or mean value. See the “Setup for SC600 Edge and
Wave Generator Measurements” section for more information.
8. Measure the baseline of each output after the topline measurement, as shown in Table 7-8. The peak-to-peak value is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements. Compare the result to the tolerance column.
7-29
5502A
Service Manual
Table 7-8. AC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
Calibrator
Output
(1 kHz)
1 mV
-1 mV
10 mV
-10 mV
25 mV
-25 mV
110 mV
-110 mV
500 mV
-500 mV
2.2 V
-2.2 V
6.6 V
-6.6 V
HP3458A
Range
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
1 V dc
1 V dc
10 V dc
10 V dc
10 V dc
10 V dc
Topline
Measurement
Baseline
Measurement
Peak-to-
Peak
Peak-to-
Peak x correction
Tolerance
(
±V)
0.000043
0.000043
0.000065
0.000065
0.000103
0.000103
0.000315
0.000315
0.00129
0.00129
0.00554
0.00554
0.01654
0.01654
AC Voltage Frequency Verification
This procedure uses:
• PM 6680 Frequency Counter with an ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or
PM 9691)
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
5502A
5502A CALIBRATOR
SC600 Cable
At 50 MHZ
PM 6680A
Figure 7-7. AC Voltage Frequency Verification Setup
hvw108.eps
7-30
SC600 Calibration Option
Verification
7
To do an ac voltage frequency verification:
1. Set the Calibrator to SCOPE mode, with the Volt menu shown in the display.
2. Push on the Calibrator.
3. Set the FUNCTION of the PM 6680 to measure frequency on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 1 M
Ω impedance, and filter off.
4. Connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator to channel A of the PM
6680 with the output cable. See Figure 7-7.
5. Set the Calibrator to output 2.1 V at each frequency shown in Table 7-9.
6. Let the PM 6680 measurement become stable.
7. Record the PM 6680 measurement for each frequency shown in Table 7-9.
8. Compare to the tolerance column of Table 7-9.
Table 7-9. AC Voltage Frequency Verification
Calibrator Frequency
PM 6680 Measurement
(Frequency)
Tolerance
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
0.000025 Hz
0.00025 Hz
0.0025 Hz
0.025 Hz
Edge Amplitude Verification
To do an edge amplitude verification:
1. Connect the SCOPE connector of the Calibrator to the HP 3458A input, with the cable and the 50
Ω termination connected to the BNC(f) to Double
Banana adapter.
2. For ac voltage output at 1 kHz, set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01,
LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL. For ac voltage output of 10 kHz, change the NPLC to
.001.
3. Set the HP3458A DELAY to .0002 for the top part of the waveform (topline) measurement, and .0007 for the lower part of the waveform (baseline).
4. Manually range lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the baseline measurements. Use this same range for the related baseline measurements at each step. See Table 7-10.
Note
For the edge function, the topline is near 0 V and the baseline is a negative voltage.
5. For each measurement, get samples for 2 seconds minimum, with the HP
3458A MATH functions to retrieve the average or mean value. See the
“Setup for SC600 Edge Wave Generator Measurements” section to learn more.
7-31
5502A
Service Manual
6. The peak-to-peak value of the waveform is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements. Multiply the measurements by (0.5 * (50 +
Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error.
7. Record each measurement in Table 7-10.
Table 7-10. Edge Amplification Verification
Calibrator
Edge Output
HP3458A
Range
100 mV, 1 kHz 100 mV dc
1.00V, 1 kHz 1 V dc
5 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
1 0 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
25 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
50 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
100 mV, 10 kHz 1 V dc
500 mV, 10 kHz 1 V dc
1.00 V, 10 kHz 1 V dc
2.5 V, 10 kHz 10 V dc
Topline
Measurement
Baseline
Measurement
Peak-to-
Peak
Peak-to-
Peak x correction
Tolerance
(
±V)
0.0022
0.0202
0.0003
0.0004
0.0007
0.0012
0.0022
0.0102
0.0202
0.0502
Edge Frequency Verification
This procedure uses:
• PM 6680 Frequency Counter with an ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or
PM 9691)
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
To do an Edge Frequency Verification:
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 7-7.
2. Set the Calibrator to SCOPE mode, with the edge menu shown in the display.
3. Push on the Calibrator.
4. Set the FUNCTION of the PM 6680 to measure frequency on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 50
Ω impedance, and filter off.
5. Connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator to channel A of the PM
6680 with the output cable.
6. Set the Calibrator to output 2.5 V at each frequency shown in Table 7-11.
7. Let the PM 6680 measurement become stable.
8. Record the PM 6680 measurement for each frequency shown in Table 7-11.
9. Compare to the tolerance column of Table 7-11.
7-32
SC600 Calibration Option
Verification
7
Calibrator Frequency (output @
1 kHz
10 kHz
100 kHz
2,5 V p-p)
Table 7-11. Edge Frequency Verification
PM 6680 Measurement
(Frequency)
0.0025 Hz
0.025 Hz
0.25 Hz
Tolerance
Table 7-11. Edge Frequency Verification (cont.)
Calibrator Frequency (output @
2,5 V p-p)
1 MHz
10 MHz
PM 6680 Measurement
(Frequency)
2.5 Hz
25 Hz
Tolerance
Edge Duty Cycle Verification
This procedure uses:
• PM 6680 Frequency Counter with an ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or
PM 9691)
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
To do an Edge Duty Cycle Verification:
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 7-7.
2. Set the Calibrator to SCOPE mode, with the edge menu shown in the display.
3. Push on the Calibrator.
4. Set the FUNCTION of the PM 6680 to measure duty cycle on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 50
Ω impedance, and filter off.
5. Connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator to channel A of the PM
6680 with the output cable.
6. Set the Calibrator to output 2.5 V at 1 MHz.
7. Let the PM 6680 measurement become stable.
8. Compare to the duty cycle measurement to 50 %
±5 %.
Edge Rise Time Verification
This verification is a test of the rise time of the edge function. Aberrations are also examined.
This procedure uses:
• High Frequency Digital Storage Oscilloscope: Tektronix 11801 with Tektronix
SD-22/26 sampling head
• 3 dB attenuator, 3.5 mm (m/f)
• BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter (2)
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
• Second BNC cable
7-33
5502A
Service Manual
To do an edge rise time verification:
1. Connect the output cable to the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator. Connect the other end of the output cable to one of the BNC(f) to 3.5 mm (m) adapter and then to the sampling head of the DSO through the 3 dB attenuator.
2. Use the second BNC cable with the BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter attached to connect the TRIG OUT of the Calibrator to the trigger input of the DSO. See
Figure 7-8.
5502A
Tek 11801 with SD26 Sampling Head
5502A CALIBRATOR
SC600
Cable
3 dB Attenuator
3.5 mm (m/f)
7-34
BNC(F) to
3.5 mm (m)
Adapter hvw109.eps
Figure 7-8. Edge Rise Time Verification Setup
3. Set the Calibrator to SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu shown in the display.
4. Push on the Calibrator.
5. Push the TRIG softkey on the Calibrator until /1 shows in the display.
6. Set the Calibrator output to 250 mV @ 1 kHz.
7. Set the DSO to:
• Main Time Base:
• Horizontal scale:
40 ns
500 ps/div
• Measurement function: Rise Time
8. Set the Calibrator to output the voltage and frequency shown in Table 7-12.
9. Push on the Calibrator.
10. Change the vertical scale of the DSO to the value shown in Table 7-12.
11. Adjust the main time base position and vertical offset until the edge signal is in the center of the DSO display.
12. Reacord the rise time measurement in column A of Table 7-12.
SC600 Calibration Option
Verification
7
13. Correct the rise time measurement for the rise time of the SD-22/26 sampling head. The SD-22/26 rise time is specified as <28 ps.
Column B =
√
(Column A) time)
2
2
– (SD-22/26 rise
14. The measured edge rise time must be less than the time shown in Table 7-
12.
90%
Rise time measures between these two points
10%
250 mV
250 mV
500 mV
500 mV
1 V
1 V
2.5 V
2.5 V
Calibrator Output
1 MHz
10 MHz
1 MHz
10 MHz
1 MHz
10 MHz
1 MHz
10 MHz om033i.eps
Figure 7-9. Edge Rise Time
Table 7-12. Edge Rise Time Verification
20.0
20.0
50.0
50.0
100.0
100.0
200.0
200.0
DSO Vertical A 11801
Measurement
B Corrected
Measurement
Tolerance
< 300 ps
< 350 ps
< 300 ps
< 350 ps
< 300 ps
< 350 ps
< 300 ps
< 350 ps
7-35
5502A
Service Manual
Edged Aberration Verification
This procedure uses:
• Tektronix 11801 oscilloscope with SC22/26 sampling head
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
To do edge aberration verification:
1. Make sure that the SC600 is in the edge mode (the edge menu is shown in the display), and set it to output 1 V p-p @ 1 MHz.
2. Push .
3. Connect the Calibrator to the oscilloscope as shown in Figure 7-8.
4. Set the oscilloscope vertical gain to 10 mV/div and horizontal time base to
1 ns/div.
5. Set the oscilloscope to show the 90 % point of the edge signal. Use this point as the reference level.
6. Set the oscilloscope to show the first 10 ns of the edge signal with the rising edge at the left edge of the oscilloscope display.
Note
With this setup, each vertical line of the oscilloscope display shows a
1 % aberration.
7. Make sure the SC600 meets the specifications shown in Table 7-13.
Table 7-13. Edge Aberrations
0 - 2 ns
2 - 5 ns
5 - 15 ns
> 15 ns
Time from 50 % of Rising Edge Typical Edge Aberrations
< 32 mV (3.2%)
< 22 mV (2.2%)
< 12 mV (1.2%)
< 7 mV (0.7%)
Tunnel Diode Pulser Drive Amplitude Verification
This procedure uses:
• Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
• BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
To do a Diode Pulser Drive Amplitude verification:
1. Set the Calibrator to SCOPE mode, with the edge menu shown in the display.
2. Connect the SCOPE connector of the Calibrator to the HP 3458A input, with the cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter. See Figure 7-4.
3. Push the TDPULSE softkey on the Calibrator.
4. Set the output to 80 V peak-to-peak, 100 kHz, STANDBY.
5. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL.
7-36
SC600 Calibration Option
Verification
7
6. Set the HP3458A DELAY to .0012 for the top part of the waveform (i.e. topline) measurement, and .0007 for the lower part of the waveform (i.e. baseline).
7. Manually range lock the HP 3458A to the 100 V range.
8. Change the Calibrator Mainframe output frequency to 10 kHz.
9. Push , and use the HP 3458A to measure the topline and baseline.
10. The peak-to-peak value is the difference between the topline and baseline.
Record these values in Table 7-14, and compare against the tolerance.
Table 7-14. Tunnel Diode Pulser Amplitude Verification
Calibrator
Edge
Output
HP3458A
Range
80 V, 10 kHz 100 V dc
Topline
Measurement
Baseline
Measurement
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Verification
This procedure uses:
• 5790A AC Measurement Standard
• BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug adapter
Peak-to-Peak
1.6
Tolerance
(
±V)
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
To do a Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Verification:
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 7-4.
2. Set the Calibrator to SCOPE mode, with the Levsine menu shown in the display.
3. Push .
4. Connect the output cable to the 50
Ω feedthrough termination.
5. Connect the one end of the output cable to the SCOPE connector of the
Calibrator
6. Connect the 50
Ω feedthrough termination at the other end of the cable to input 2 of the 5790A with the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
7. Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and
Hi Res on.
8. Set the Calibrator to a value shown in column 1 of the Table 7-15.
9. Let the 5790A measurement become stable and then record the 5790A measurement in the table.
10. Multiply the rms measurement by the conversion factor of 2.8284 to get the peak-to-peak value.
11. Multiply the measurements by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error.
12. Compare the result to the value in the tolerance column.
7-37
5502A
Service Manual
Calibrator
Output
(@ 50 kHz)
Table 7-15. Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Verification
5790A
Measurement
(V rms)
5790A
Measurement x
2.8284 (V p-p)
V p-p Value x correction
Tolerance (V p-p)
7-38
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification
This procedure uses:
• PM 6680 Frequency Counter with a prescaler for the Channel C input (Option
PM 9621, PM 9624, or PM 9625) and ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or
PM 9691)
• BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
To do a leveled sine wave frequency verification:
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 7-7.
2. Set the Calibrator to SCOPE mode, with the Levsine menu shown in the display.
3. Set the PM 6680 to the measure frequency function with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, and 50
Ω impedance.
4. Connect one end of the output cable to the SCOPE connector of the
Calibrator.
5. Connect the BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter to the other end of the output cable.
6. Connect the Type N connector to the PM 6680 channel shown in Table 7-16.
7. Set the filter on the PM 6680 as shown in Table 7-16.
8. Set the Calibrator output to the parameters shown in Table 7-16.
9. Push .
SC600 Calibration Option
Verification
7
10. Let the PM 6680 measurement become stable and then record the frequency measurement in Table 7-16.
Table 7-16. Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification
Calibrator
Frequency
(@ 5.5 V p-p)
50 kHz
500 kHz
5 MHz
50 MHz
500 MHz
PM 6680 Settings
A
A
A
A
C
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
PM 6680
(Frequency)
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification
This procedure uses:
• Hewlett-Packard 8590A Spectrum Analyzer
• BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
To do a Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification:
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 7-10.
Tolerance
0.125 Hz
1.25 Hz
12.5 Hz
125 Hz
1250 Hz
HP 8590A
5502A
5502A CALIBRATOR
BNC(F) to Type N (M)
Adapter
SC600
Cable
Figure 7-10. Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification Setup
2. Set the Calibrator to Scope mode with the Levsine menu shown in the display.
3. Connect one end of the Output cable to the SCOPE connector of the
Calibrator.
4. Connect the BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter to the other end of the output cable. hvw110.eps
7-39
5502A
Service Manual
5. Connect the Type N connector to the HP 8590A.
6. Set the Calibrator to output 5.5 V p-p at each frequency on Table 7-17.
7. Push .
8. Set the HP 8590A start frequency to the Calibrator output frequency.
9. Set the HP 8590A stop frequency to 10 times the Calibrator output frequency.
10. Set the HP 8590A reference level at +19 dBm.
11. Record the harmonic level measurement for each frequency and harmonic shown in Table 7-17. For harmonics 3, 4, and 5, record the highest harmonic level of the three measured. Harmonics must be below the levels listed in the tolerance column of Table 7-17.
Table 7-17. Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification
Calibrator Output
Frequency
(@ 5.5 V p-p)
4 MHz
8 MHz
8 MHz
10 MHz
10 MHz
20 MHz
400 kHz
800 kHz
800 kHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
2 MHz
2 MHz
4 MHz
50 kHz
50 kHz
100 kHz
100 kHz
200 kHz
200 kHz
400 kHz
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
Harmonic
HP 8590A
Measurement (dB)
Tolerance
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-33 dB
-46 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
7-40
SC600 Calibration Option
Verification
7
Table 7-17. Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification (cont.)
Calibrator Output
Frequency
(@ 5.5 V p-p)
20 MHz
40 MHz
40 MHz
80 MHz
80 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
200 MHz
200 MHz
400 MHz
400 MHz
600 MHz
600 MHz
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
Harmonic
HP 8590A
Measurement (dB)
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
Tolerance
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Verification
Leveled Sine Wave flatness verification is divided into two frequency bands: 50 kHz to 10 MHz (low frequency) and >10 MHz to 600 MHz (high frequency). The equipment setups are different for each band. Leveled Sine Wave flatness is measured relative to 50 kHz. This is a direct measurement in the low frequency band. You must do a “transfer” measurement at 10 MHz in the high frequency band to calculate a flatness relative to 50 kHz.
Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness
All low frequency flatness procedures use:
• 5790A/03 AC Measurement Standard with Wideband option
• BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
1. Connect one end of the output cable to the SCOPE connector of the
Calibrator.
2. Connect the BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter to the other end of the output cable.
3. Connect the Type N connector to the HP 5790A WIDEBANC input. See
Figure 7-11.
4. Set the HP 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi Res on.
7-41
5502A
Service Manual
5590A
5790A
AC MEASUREMENT
STANDARD
5502A
5502A CALIBRATOR
INPUT 1
1000V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
SHUNT
3V RMS MAX
INPUT 2
1000V RMS MAX
HI
LO
WIDEBAND
7V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
10V PEAK
MAX
10V PK
MAX
GROUND GUARD hvw103.eps
Figure 7-11. Calibrator to 5790A Measurement Standard Connections
Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness
All high frequency flatness procedures use:
• Hewlett-Packard 437B Power Meter
• Hewlett-Packard 8482A and 8481D Power Sensors
• BNC(f) to Type N(f) adapter
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
Note
When high frequencies at voltages less than 63 mV p-p are verified, use the 8481D Power Sensor. For voltages 63 mV p-p and higher, use the 8482A Power Sensor.
Connect the HP 437B Power Meter to the 8482A or the 8481D Power Sensor as shown in Figure 7-12. To learn more about how to connect these two instruments, refer to the operator manuals of the instruments.
Connect the power meter/power sensor combination to the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator. See Figure 7-13.
The HP 437B Power Meter must be configured with:
• PRESET
• WATTS
• SENSOR TABLE 0 (default)
Zero and self-calibrate the power meter with the power sensor. Refer to the HP
437B operators manual to learn more.
7-42
SC600 Calibration Option
Verification
7
Figure 7-12. HP 437B Power Meter to the HP 8482A or 8481D Power Sensor Connections
om035f.eps
5502A
CALIBRATOR
hvw104.eps
Figure 7-13. Calibrator to the HP Power Meter and Power Sensor Connections
Low Frequency Verification
This procedure gives an example of a low frequency flatness test with a 5.5 V
Calibrator output. Use the same procedure for other amplitudes. Compare the results with the flatness specification shown in Table 7-18.
1. Set the Calibrator to output of 5.5 V @ 500 kHz.
2. Push .
3. Let the 5790A measurement become stable. The 5790A should display approximately 1.94 V rms.
4. Record the 5790A measurement in column A of Table 7-18.
5. Set the Calibrator frequency to 50 kHZ.
6. Let the 5790A measurement become stable and then record the 5790A measurement in column B of Table 7-18.
7. Set the Calibrator to the next frequency shown in Table 7-18.
8. Let the 5790A measurement become stabile and then record the measurement in column A of Table 7-18.
9. Set the Calibrator frequency to 50 kHZ.
10. Let the 5790A measurement become stabile and then record the 5790A measurement in column B of Table 7-18.
11. Do steps 7 through 10 again for all the frequencies shown in Table 7-18.
Continue until you have completed Columns A and B.
7-43
5502A
Service Manual
After you fill in columns A and B for all rows of the table, push . Use the recorded values in columns A and B to calculate and record the value in column
C for all rows.
Column C = 100
(
Column A – Column
B
Column B
)
Compare column C to the specifications shown in the last column.
Table 7-18. Low Frequency Flatness Verification at 5.5 V
Calibrator
Frequency
A
B
50 kHz
C
Calibrator Flatness
Specification (%)
500 kHz
1 MHz
±1.50
±1.50
2 MHz
5 MHz
±1.50
±1.50
10 MHz ±1.50
Fill in Columns A through C as follows:
A Record 5790A measurement (mV) for the present frequency.
B
C
Record 5790A measurement (mV) for 50 kHz.
Compute and record the Calibrator Flatness deviation (%): 100 * ((Column A) – (Column B))/ Column B
High Frequency Verification
This procedure gives an example of a high frequency flatness test with a 5.5 V
Calibrator output. Use the same procedure for other amplitudes. Compare the results with the flatness specification shown in Table 7-19.
1. Set the Calibrator to output of 5.5 V @ 30 MHz.
2. Push .
3. Let the power meter measurement become stable. The power meter measurement should be approximately 75 mW.
4. Record the power meter measurement in column A of Table 7-19.
5. Set the Calibrator frequency to 10 MHz.
6. Let the power meter measurement become stable and then record the measurement in column B of Table 7-19.
7. Set the Calibrator to the next frequency shown in Table 7-19.
8. Let the power meter measurement become stable and then record the measurement in column A of Table 7-19.
9. Set the Calibrator frequency to 10 MHz.
10. Let the power meter measurement become stable and then record the measurement in column B of Table 7-19.
11. Do steps 7 through 10 again for all the frequencies shown in Table 7-19.
Continue until you have completed Columns A and B.
When you have filled in columns A and B for all rows of the table, push . Use the recorded values in columns A and B to calculate and record the value in column C for all rows.
7-44
SC600 Calibration Option
Verification
7
Table 7-19. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 5.5 V
Calibrator
Frequency
(MHz)
A
B
(10 MHz)
C D E F G
Calibrator
Flatness
Specification (%)
30
70
120
290
360
390
400
480
±1.50
±1.50
±2.00
±2.00
±4.00
±4.00
±4.00
±4.00
570
580
±4.00
±4.00
590 ±4.00
600
±4.00
Fill in Columns A through G as follows:
A Record the 437B present frequency measurement (W).
B Record the 437B 10 MHz measurement (W).
C Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
D Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W). CF * (Column B entry)
E Calculate and record error relative to 10 MHz (%):
F Record the 10 MHz rms error (%) for 5.5 V from Table 7-18, column C.
G Calculate and record that Calibrator Flatness deviation (%): (Colum E entry) + (Colum F entry)
Time Marker Verification
This procedure uses:
• PM 6680 Frequency Counter with a prescaler for the Channel C input (Option
PM 9621, PM 9624, or PM 9625) and ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or
PM 9691)
• BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
To do a Time Marker Verification:
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 7-7.
2. Set the PM 6680 to the measure frequency function with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, and 50
Ω impedance.
3. Set the Calibrator to SCOPE mode, with the Marker menu shown in the display.
4. Push .
5. Set the Calibrator output to the parameters shown in Table 7-16.
6. Connect one end of the Output cable to the SCOPE connector of the
Calibrator.
7. Connect the BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter to the other end of the output
7-45
5502A
Service Manual
Calibrator
Period
5 s
2 s
50.0 ms
20.0 ms
10.0 ms
100 ns
50.0 ns
20.0 ns
10.0 ns
5.00 ns
2.00 ns cable.
8. Connect the Type N connector to the PM 6680 channel shown in Table 7-16.
9. Set the filter on the PM 6680 as shown in Table 7-16.
10. Let the PM 6680 measurement become stable and then record the frequency measurement in Table 7-16.
11. Calculate the period of the frequency with Period = 1/frequency and record it on the table.
12. Compare the period value to the value in the tolerance column.
Table 7-20. Time Marker Verification
PM 6680 Settings PM 6680 Measurement
Channel Filter Frequency Period
Tolerance
A
A
On
On
0.3489454 s
0.0582996 s
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
C
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
3.872E-05 s
5E-08 s
2.5E-08 s
2.5E-13 s
1.25E-13 s
5E-14 s
2.5E-14 s
1.25E-14 s
5E-15 s
7-46
Wave Generator Verification
This procedure uses:
• 5790A AC Measurement Standard
• BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug adapter
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
SC600 Calibration Option
Verification
5502A
5502A CALIBRATOR
SC600
Cable
BNC (F) to
Double Banana
Adapter
50 Ω
Feedthrough
Termination hvw111.eps
Figure 7-14. Wave Generator Verification Connections
Wave Generator Verification is done at two different impedances: 1 M
Ω and
50
Ω.
Wave Generator Verification Setup
To setup the equipment for wave generator verification:
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 7-14.
2. Set the Calibrator to SCOPE mode, with the Wavegen menu shown in the display.
3. Push .
4. Set offset to 0 mV.
5. Set the Calibrator frequency to 1 kHz.
7
7-47
5502A
Service Manual
Verification at 1 M
Ω
1. Set the Calibrator to 1 M
Ω.
Note
The SCOPEZ softkey toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and
1 M
Ω
.
2. Connect the one end of the output cable to the SCOPE connector of the
Calibrator
3. Connect the other end of the cable to input 2 of the 5790A with the BNC(f) to
Double Banana adapter.
4. Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and
Hi Res on.
5. Set the Calibrator to output the wave type and voltage shown in Table 7-21.
6. Let the 5790A measurement become stable and then record the 5790A measurement for each wave type and voltage in Table 7-21.
7. Multiply the rms measurement by the conversion factor in Table 7-21 to convert the measurement to a peak-to-peak value.
8. Compare the result to the value in the tolerance column.
7-48
SC600 Calibration Option
Verification
7
Verification at 50
Ω
1. Set the Calibrator to 50
Ω.
Note
The SCOPEZ softkey toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and
1 M
Ω
.
2. Connect one end of the output cable to the 50
Ω feedthrough termination.
3. Connect the other end of the output cable to the SCOPE connector of the
Calibrator
4. Connect the 50
Ω feedthrough termination at the other end of the cable to input 2 of the 5790A with the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
5. Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and
Hi Res on.
6. Set the Calibrator to output the wave type and voltage shown in Table 7-22.
7. Let the 5790A measurement become stable and then record the 5790A measurement for each wave type and voltage in Table 7-22.
8. Multiply the rms measurement by the conversion factor in Table 7-22 to convert the measurement to a peak-to-peak value.
9. Multiply the peak-to-peak value by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload
= the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error.
10. Compare the result to the value in the tolerance column.
Calibrator
Wave Type
Table 7-21. Wave Generator Verification at 1 M
Ω
Calibrator
Output
(@ 10 kHZ)
5790A
Measurement
(V rms)
Conversion
Factor
5790A
Measurement x Conversion
Factor
(V p-p)
Tolerance (V p-p)
square 220 mV 2.0000 0.0067 V
7-49
5502A
Service Manual
Calibrator
Wave Type
Table 7-21. Wave Generator Verification at 1 M
Ω (cont.)
Calibrator
Output
(@ 10 kHZ)
5790A
Measurement
(V rms)
Conversion
Factor
5790A
Measurement x Conversion
Factor
(V p-p)
Tolerance (V p-p)
7-50
Calibrator
Wave
Type
square
Calibrator
Output
(@ 10 kHZ)
Table 7-22. Wave Generator Verification at 50
Ω
5790A
Measurement
(V rms)
Conversion
Factor
5790A
Measurement x Conversion
Factor
(V p-p)
V p-p value x correction
1.8 mV 2.0000
Tolerance
(V p-p)
0.000154 V
SC600 Calibration Option
Verification
7
Calibrator
Wave
Type
Table 7-22. Wave Generation Verification at 50
Ω (cont.)
Calibrator
Output
(@ 10 kHZ)
5790A
Measurement
(V rms)
Conversion
Factor
5790A
Measurement x Conversion
Factor
(V p-p)
V p-p value x correction
Tolerance
(V p-p)
Pulse Width Verification
This procedure uses:
• High Frequency Digital Storage Oscilloscope: Tektronix 11801 with Tektronix
SD-22/26 sampling head
• 3 dB attenuator, 3.5 mm (m/f)
7-51
5502A
Service Manual
• BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter (2)
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
• Second BNC cable
To do a pulse width verification:
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 7-8.
2. Connect the output cable to the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator. Connect the other end of the output cable to one of the BNC(f) to 3.5 mm (m) adapter and then to the sampling head of the DSO through the 3 dB attenuator.
3. Use the second BNC cable with the BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter attached to connect the TRIG OUT of the Calibrator to the trigger input of the DSO.
4. Set the Calibrator to SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu shown in the display.
5. Push on the Calibrator.
6. Push the TRIG softkey on the Calibrator until /1 shows in the display.
7. Set the DSO to:
• Main Time Base:
• Vertical scale:
• Trigger:
40 ns
200 mV/div source = ext, level = 0.5 V, ext. atten. = x10, slope = +, mode = auto
• Measurement function: positive width
8. Set the Calibrator to the pulse width and period shown in Table 7-23. Set the voltage to 1 V.
9. Change the horizontal scale on the DSO to the value shown in Table 7-23.
10. Adjust the main time base position and vertical offset until the pulse signal is in the center of the DSO display.
11. Record the width measurement.
12. Compare the width measurement to the value in the tolerance column of the table.
Table 7-23. Pulse Width Verification
Low Limit High Limit
2 μs Period/4.00 ns
20 μs Period/4.00 ns
200
μs Period/4.00 ns
2 ms Period/40.00 ns
4.000
4.000
4.000
40.000
1.80
1.80
1.80
36.00
6.20
6.20
6.20
44.00
Pulse Period Verification
This procedure uses:
• PM 6680 Frequency Counter with an ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or
PM 9691)
7-52
SC600 Calibration Option
Verification
7
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
To do a pulse period verification:
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 7-7.
2. Set the Calibrator to SCOPE mode, with the Pulse menu shown in the display.
3. Push on the Calibrator.
4. Set the PM 6680 to the measure period on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 50
Ω impedance, and filter off.
5. Connect one end of the output cable to the SCOPE connector of the
Calibrator.
6. Connect the other end of the output cable to the channel A input of the PM
6680.
7. Set the Calibrator to the pulse width and period shown in Table 7-24. Set the voltage to 2.5V.
8. Let the PM 6680 measurement become stable and then record the period measurement in Table 7-24.
9. Compare the result to the tolerance column.
Table 7-24. Pulse Period Verification
Calibrator Output PM 6680 Measurement
80 ns
500 ns
500 ns
200 ns
10 ms
20 ms
5E-13 s
2.5E-08 s
5.0E-08 s
MeasZ Resistance Verification
The verification procedure for the MeasZ Resistance function is a resistance measurement of a known value resistance and then compare the measured resistance to the value of the resistor.
This procedure uses:
• Resistors of known values: 1.5 MΩ, 1 MΩ, 60 Ω, 50 Ω, and 40 Ω nominal.
• Adapters to connect resistors to a BNC(f) connector.
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
To do a measz resistance verification:
1. Set the Calibrator to SCOPE mode, with the MeasZ menu shown in the display.
2. Set the Calibrator MeasZ resistance range to the value shown in Table 7-25.
Note
The MeasZ softkey toggles the MeasZ ranges.
3. Connect one end of the output cable to the SCOPE connector of the
Calibrator.
4. Connect the resistor shown in Table 7-25 to the other end of the output cable.
7-53
5502A
Service Manual
See Figure 7-6.
Note
The resistor must make a solid connection to a BNC(f) connector.
The resistance value must be known at this BNC(f) connector. Fluke uses an HP 3458A DMM to make a 4-wire measurement at the
BNC(f) connector to get the actual resistance.
5. Let the Calibrator measurement become stable.
6. Record the measurement in Table 7-25.
7. Compare the measured resistance value to the actual resistance of the resistor and the value in the tolerance column of the table.
Table 7-25. MeasZ Resistance Verification
Calibrator MeasZ
Range
Nominal
Resistance
Value
Calibrator
Resistance
Measurement
res 50
Ω 40 res 50
Ω 50 res 50
Ω 60 res 1M
Ω 600 res 1M
Ω 1 res 1M Ω 1.5
Actual
Resistance
Value
Tolerance
MeasZ Capacitance Verification
The verification procedure for the MeasZ Capacitance function is a capacitance measurement of a known value capacitance and then compare the measured capacitance to the value of the capacitance.
This procedure uses:
• Adapter and capacitors to make 5 pF, 29 pF, and 49 pF nominal values at the end of a BNC(f) connector.
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
To do a MeasZ capacitance verification:
1. Set the Calibrator to SCOPE mode, with the MeasZ menu shown in the display.
2. Set the Calibrator MeasZ capacitance range to cap.
Note
The MeasZ softkey toggles the MeasZ ranges.
3. Connect one end of the output cable to the SCOPE connector of the
Calibrator. Do not connect anything to the other end of this cable.
4. Let the Calibrator measurement become stable and then push the SET
OFFSET softkey to zero the capacitance measurement.
5. Connect the other end of the cable to the capacitance shown in Table 7-26.
See Figure 7-6.
7-54
SC600 Calibration Option
Verification
7
6. Let the Calibrator measurement become stable.
7. Record the measurement in Table 7-26.
8. Compare the measured capacitance value to the actual capacitance and the value in the tolerance column of the table.
Table 7-26. MeasZ Capacitance Verification
Nominal
Capacitance Value
Calibrator
Capacitance
Measurement
5 pF
29 pF
49 pF
Overload Function Verification
This procedure uses:
Actual Capacitance
Value
0.75 pF
1.95 pF
2.95 pF
Tolerance
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
To do an overload function verification:
1. Connect the output cable and 50
Ω feedthrough termination to the Calibrator as shown in Figure 7-15.
5502A
5502A CALIBRATOR
SC600 Cable
50 Ω Feedthrough
Termination hvw112.eps
Figure 7-15. Overload Function Verification Connections
2. Set the Calibrator to SCOPE mode, with the Overload menu shown in the display.
3. Connect one end of the output cable to the 50 Ω feedthrough termination.
4. Connect the other end of the output cable to the SCOPE connector of the
Calibrator.
5. Set the Calibrator to output 5.000 V, dc (OUT VAL softkey), and time limit =
7-55
5502A
Service Manual
60 s (T LIMIT softkey).
6. Push on the Calibrator and make sure the OPR timer display increments.
7. Remove the 50
Ω feedthrough termination before 60 seconds and make sure the Calibrator goes to standby (STBY).
8. Replace the 50
Ω feedthrough termination on the end of the output cable.
9. Set the Calibrator output to 5.000 V, ac (OUT VAL softkey).
10. Push on the Calibrator and make sure the OPR timer display increments.
11. Remove the 50
Ω feedthrough termination before 60 seconds and make sure the Calibrator goes to standby (STBY).
SC600 Hardware Adjustments
Hardware adjustments must be made to the leveled sine and edge functions each time the SC600 is repaired. This section contains the adjustment procedures and a test equipment list with recommended models that are necessary to do these adjustments. Equivalent models can be used if necessary.
Necessary Equipment
To do the hardware adjustments in this section, you must have:
• Standard adjustment tool to adjust the pots and trimmer caps
• Oscilloscope Mainframe and Sampling Head (Tektronix 11801 with SD-22/26 or Tektronix TDS 820 with 8 GHz bandwidth)
• 10 dB Attenuator (Weinschel 9-10 (SMA), or Weinschel 18W-10, or equivalent)
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
• Spectrum Analyzer (Hewlett-Packard 8590A)
Note
The models shown in this list are recommended to get accurate results.
How to Adjust the Leveled Sine Wave Function
There are two adjustment procedures that you must do for the leveled sine wave function. The first procedure adjusts the balance out of the LO VCO so that the signal is balanced between the two VCOs. The second procedure adjusts the harmonics.
Equipment Setup
This procedure uses the spectrum analyzer. Before you start this procedure, make sure that the Calibrator is in leveled sine wave mode (the Levsine menu shows in the display), and set it to output 5.5 V p-p @ 600 MHz.
1. Push .
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 7-10.
3. Adjust the Spectrum Analyzer so that it shows one peak across its horizontal center line in the display. The far right of the peak is fixed at the far right of the center line, as shown in Figure 7-16.
7-56
SC600 Calibration Option
SC600 Hardware Adjustments
7
How to Adjust the Leveled Sine Wave VCO Balance
To adjust leveled sine wave VCO balance:
Note
The equipment must be setup as described in the Equipment Setup section.
1. Set the Calibrator to 5.5 V @ 600 MHz.
2. Set the Spectrum Analyzer to:
• Start frequency
• Stop frequency:
• Resolution bandwidth:
• Video Bandwidth:
3 kHz
• Reference level:
10 MHz
800 MHz
30 kHz
20 dBm
The spectrum analyzer will show a spur at 153 MHz. See Figure 7-16 to identify the spur.
3. Turn R1 counterclockwise until the spur is at minimum amplitude.
Note
As you turn R1, the spur will move down the waveform in the display. Stop the adjustment with the spur is at minimum amplitude.
If you adjust too far, the spur will disappear.
The signal is balanced between the VCOs and the adjustment is complete when the spur is at minimum amplitude.
R1
Figure 7-16. Leveled Sine Wave Balance Adjustment
How to Adjust the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics
To adjust the leveled sine wave harmonics:
Note
The equipment must be setup as described in the “Equipment
Setup” section.
1. Set the Calibrator to 5.5 V @ 600 MHz. om052f.eps
7-57
5502A
Service Manual
2. Set the Spectrum Analyzer to:
• Start frequency
• Stop frequency:
• Resolution bandwidth:
• Video Bandwidth:
3 kHz
• Reference level:
50 MHz
500 MHz
3 MHz
20 dBm
3. Use the Peak Search function of the spectrum analyzer to find the reference signal. The spectrum analyzer will show the fundamental and second and third harmonics. The harmonics must be adjusted so that the second harmonic is at 40 dBc and the third harmonic is typically at 50 dBc as shown in Figure 7-17.
4. Adjust R8 until the peaks of the second and third harmonics are at the correct dB level.
Note
As you adjust, it is possible the second harmonic will be at 40 dBc but the third harmonic is not at 50 dBc. Continue to adjust R8. The second harmonic will change, but there is a point at which the harmonics will be at the correct decibel level.
40 dBc
50 dBc
R8
7-58
2nd harmonic
3rd harmonic
Figure 7-17. Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Adjustment
How to Adjust the Aberrations for the Edge Function
You must do the adjustment procedure after you repair the edge function.
Note
To make sure the edge aberrations are set to national standards, you must send the Calibrator to Fluke, or other company that has traceability for aberrations. Fluke has a reference pulse that is sent to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) for characterization. This data is then sent to high speed sampling heads, which are used to adjust and verify the SC600.
Equipment Setup
This procedure uses: om051f.eps
SC600 Calibration Option
SC600 Hardware Adjustments
7
• Oscilloscope: Tektronix 11801 with SD22/26 input module or Tektronix TDS
820 with 8 GHz bandwidth.
• 10 dB Attenuator: Weinschel 9-10 (SMA) or Weinschel 18W-10 or an equivalent
• Output cable supplied with the SC600
Before you start the aberration adjustment procedure:
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 7-8.
2. Set the Calibrator to SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu shown in the display.
3. Set the Calibrator to 1 V p-p @ 1 MHz.
4. Push .
5. Set the DSO to:
• Vertical scale:
• Horizontal scale:
10 mV/div
1 ns/div
6. Set the DSO to show the 90 % point of the edge signal. Use this point as the reference level.
7. Set the DSO to show the first 10 ns of the edge signal with the rising edge at the left edge of the oscilloscope display.
How to Adjust the Edge Aberrations
See Figure 7-18 while you do the adjustment procedure.
1. Adjust A90R13 to set the edge signal at the right edge of oscilloscope display, at 10 ns, to the reference level set above.
2. Adjust A90R36 so the first overshoot is the same amplitude as the subsequent highest aberration.
3. Adjust A90R35 so that the second and third overshoot aberrations are the same amplitude as the first aberration.
4. Adjust A90R12 to set the edge signal to occur between 2 ns and 10 ns to the reference level set above.
5. Adjust A90R36 and A90R35 again to get equal amplitudes for the first, second, and third aberrations.
6. Adjust A90R13 to set the edge signal to occur between 0 ns and 2 ns to the reference point set above. Put the aberrations in the center so the peaks are equal above and below the reference level.
7. Adjust A90R12 again if necessary to keep the edge signal to occur between
2 ns and 10 ns at the reference level.
8. Adjust A90R13 again if necessary to keep the edge signal to occur between
0 ns and 2 ns at the reference level.
9. Set the UUT output to 250 mV and the oscilloscope vertical to 2 mV/div.
Examine the aberrations.
10. Connect the 10 dB attenuator to the oscilloscope input. Connect the UUT to the attenuator and set the UUT output to 2.5 V.
11. Set the oscilloscope vertical to 5 mV/div. Examine the aberrations.
7-59
5502A
Service Manual
12. Make sure the rise time is <300 ps at 250 mV, 1 V, and 2.5 V outputs.
1st Aberration
2nd Aberration
3rd Aberration
T
R36
R12
R13
R35
Figure 7-18. Edge Aberrations Adjustment
om050f.eps
7-60

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- Calibrates a wide range of electrical and electronic instruments
- High accuracy and precision
- Versatile and easy to use
- Local and remote operation
- Overload protection
- Built-in help system
- Compact and portable